Pioneer DVJ-1000 Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions DVD PLAYER DVJ-1000
2 The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D1-4-2-3_En-A Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. P rotect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injur y from tip- over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. P1-4-2-2_En 11) 12) 13) 14) NOTE: THE NO USER-SERVICEABLE PAR TS COMPAR TMENT WARNING IS LOCA TED ON THE APPLIANCE BOTTOM.
3 NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â R eorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE â THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCA TED ON THE BOT TOM. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED W ARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY . D1-4-2-6-1_En This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil num érique de la Classe B est conforme àla norme NMB-003 du Canada. D8-10-1-3_EF Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user â s right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling D36-P4_A_En W ARNING T o prevent a fire hazar d, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 5 cm at rear , and 5 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it fr om overheating. T o prevent fire hazar d, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: top of the DVD drive CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_B_En DRW2317-A If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En CAUTION The POWER switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
4 Before Operating Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished r eading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanat ory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. K015 En S001_En Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit you âÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now it âÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association âÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing â comfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormal â can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. T o establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , and without distortion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. T aking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. We W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely , your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association âÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet librar y , soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator , bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleaner , hair dr yer , noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw , pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research F oundation.
5 Before Operating Contents Before Operating Features ................................................................................... 6 Handling Precautions ............................................................... 8 Discs Usable with This Unit ..................................................... 9 Names and Functions of Parts ............................................... 12 Operation panel ................................................................ 12 Display .............................................................................. 14 Jog dial display ................................................................. 15 Rear panel ........................................................................ 15 Main video output (VIDEO OUT) and preview video output (PREVIEW OUT) ............................................................... 16 Connections ........................................................................... 17 1. Connections to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately) (audio output and control connector) ........................... 17 2. Control cord connection for relay play ......................... 18 3. Connection to stereo amplifier (without DJ mixer) ...... 18 4. Connection to component equipped with digital input connector .......................................... 18 5. Connection to television monitor (composite video/S-Video) ........................................... 19 6. Connection to video mixer ........................................... 20 7. Connecting the power cord ......................................... 20 Preparations Setup ...................................................................................... 21 TV system setting for video output .................................. 21 How to perform setup ...................................................... 21 Using the Setup Navigator ............................................... 21 Setup Menu items ............................................................ 23 T o return all settings to their factory defaults ................... 24 Using the Setup Menu ..................................................... 24 Advanced settings ............................................................ 25 Adjusting Dolby Digital audio ............................................ 25 Digital output setting ........................................................ 25 [Audio2] settings .............................................................. 26 [Video1] settings ............................................................... 27 Video quality adjust ........................................................... 28 [Video2] settings ............................................................... 29 [Language] Settings .......................................................... 30 Setting Parental Lock ....................................................... 33 Basic Operations Loading and Removing Discs ................................................. 35 Basic Operations .................................................................... 36 Beginning playback ........................................................... 36 Auto cue function ............................................................. 37 T o stop playback ............................................................... 37 T o eject the disc ............................................................... 37 T o temporarily interrupt playback (pause mode) ............... 37 T o change language/subtitle settings during playback (DVD only) ........................................................................ 37 Changing the viewing angle (DVD only) ........................... 38 Fast forward/fast reverse ................................................. 38 T rack search (skip) ............................................................ 39 T itle search (DVD only) ..................................................... 39 Folder search (MP3 only) .................................................. 39 Setting cue points ............................................................ 40 Changing playback speed ................................................. 40 Setting master tempo ...................................................... 41 Jog dial functions ............................................................. 41 Jog sensitivity adjustment ................................................ 41 About the W A VE display ................................................... 41 About the TEXT display .................................................... 42 Mixing different tracks (splicing) ...................................... 42 Advanced Operations Advanced Operations ............................................................. 43 Scratch play ...................................................................... 43 Hyper jog mode ................................................................ 43 Spin play ........................................................................... 43 Braking ............................................................................. 43 Hot cue ............................................................................. 43 Loop playback ................................................................... 44 Back & Forth Loop Mode ................................................. 45 Reverse play ..................................................................... 45 About fader start play ....................................................... 45 Relay play with two players .............................................. 45 Selecting tracks with MP3 navigator (MP3 only) .............. 46 T o view guide displays ...................................................... 46 Operations Using Memory Cards ........................................... 47 Recording to memory cards ............................................. 47 T o recall data recorded on memory cards ........................ 48 T o delete information recorded on memory cards ........... 50 T o copy memory card data ............................................... 50 Other T roubleshooting ...................................................................... 51 Error message display ...................................................... 53 Dot Matrix Guide Display Messages ...................................... 54 Specifications ......................................................................... 55
6 Before Operating (Features) Features This player has been designed to provide CD/DVD playback fea- tures and functions demanded by professional disco club DJs and VJs. It is a professional DVD player equipped with opera- tional ease, sound quality , and functions superior to those found on the professional analog players conventionally used by DJs. JOG DIAL Large-diameter (206 mm) dial for operating sensitivity ex- ceeding that possible with conventional analog turntables ö PITCH BEND Changes playback pitch in proportion to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. ö SCRA TCH PLA Y In VINYL mode, when the top surface of the jog dial is touched, playback stops and starts in response to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. The user can also adjust the sensitivity of start-up when the jog dial is touched and released, making pos- sible new DJ techniques. ö FRAME SEARCH When the jog dial is rotated during pause, the pause position is changed in units of individual frames (1/75th second). ö SUPER FAST SEARCH When the jog dial is rotated while depressing the manual search button, track search button or title/folder search button, the search will be performed more quickly than the conventional search or track search (or title/chapter search) functions. ö HYPER JOG MODE In VINYL mode, when the jog dial is rotated, the amount of sound or image change quadruples (x4) in response to the rotation. Per - formance possibilities are enhanced by employing this function together with the ordinary mode. JOG ADJUST This function allows you to adjust the felt resistance when rotat- ing the jog dial. ON JOG DISPLA Y The center of the jog dial is furnished with a display providing vari- ety of information, including disc status, cue point position, audio/ video memory status, jog touch detect display , and VINYL mode. W A VE DISPLA Y With an analog record, the user could look for the breaks in the grooves to use as mix points and end points. In the same way , the W A VE display reveals track br eaks in advance, allowing the DJ to use them as break points. CUE/LOOP MEMOR Y Cue points and loop points can be recorded for each disc on external SD memory cards or Multimedia cards (MMC), and re- called later as desired. HOT CUE Up to 3 hot cue points (A, B, C) can be recorded in advance and called up later for instant playback from those points. Hot cues can be used not only to record normal cue points, but also for loop point playback. REVERSE PLA Y By pulling the DIRECTION select switch toward the front (REV position), tracks can be played in reverse. TEMPO CONTROL High-performance 100 mm slider for precise adjustment of track speed Using a digital display with 0.02 % increments (within control range ñ6 %), the user can accurately and easily match the tem- pos of playback tracks. ö TEMPO CONTROL RANGE Four tempo control ranges are provided: ñ6 %, ñ10 %, ñ16 %, and WIDE. ö TEMPO CONTROL RESET This control allows tempo to be reset to the default 0 % status instantly , regardless of the slider position. ö MASTER TEMPO Allows pitch to be maintained while changing track speed. CUE ö BACK CUE By previously recording a cue point, it can be returned to instantly by pressing the CUE button during subsequent playback, thus starting playback again from that point. ö AUTO CUE This function cues a track by skipping the non-recorded portion before the beginning of music, setting the player to standby mode immediately before music begins. In this way , playback can be- gin instantly when the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed. ö CUE POINT SAMPLER This function allows one-touch playback from the cue points stored in memory , a convenient function for confirming cue points and sampling the points stored. REAL TIME SEAMLESS LOOP Allows simple setting and canceling of playback loops. Loops can be set quickly during track playback; also allows quick set- ting of a loop immediately before the end of a track, thus pre- venting the track from ending. In addition, loop functions have been facilitated by the addition of an ADJUST mode that allows one-touch modification of loop-in and loop-out points.
7 Before Operating (Features) RELOOP Once set, a loop can be returned to any number of times After canceling loop play , pressing the RELOOP/EXIT button causes playback to return and begin again from the previously set loop. T urning the function ON/OFF in time with the trackâ s rhythm allows a variety of new performance possibilities. 4-BEA T LOOP When the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button is pressed, the point at which the button is pressed is set as a loop-in point, and a loop-out point is set automatically 4 beats later , and automatic loop play is performed. ONE-TRACK LOOP When the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button is held depressed for one second or more, the chapter loop or track loop function is enabled. BACK & FORTH LOOP The Back & Forth Loop mode repeats playback in forward direc- tion from the loop-in point to loop-out point, followed by reverse play from the loop-out point to the loop-in point. PLA YING ADDRESS With an analog record, the position of the stylus gives the opera- tor an immediate grasp of the progress of playback. In the same way , the play address display shows a bar graph that provides an immediate visual grasp of the trackâ s playback progress. The current position in the track is indicated by the length of the bar; in addition, the bar flashes to warn that playback is approaching the end of the track. F ADER ST ART When the player is connected to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold sepa- rately), the mixerâ s fader operation can be used to perform fader start and back cue. MUL TI READ Discs readable on this player include CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in audio CD format or MP3), and DVD-R/DVD-RW (recorded in video format or MP3). However , since this player uses high-speed data read for the purposes of its DJ operations, some discs may not play back properly depending on the characteristics of the disc and the recorder , as well as a result of dirt or scratches on the disc, etc. MP3 DJ PLA Y This function allows use of the DJ function to play MP3 files re- corded on CD or DVD. PREVIEW MONITOR OUTPUT This is an auxiliary video output that produces an overlay display of operating information on the main video output screen, and provides the DJ with a visual aids when operating the unit. Dur - ing use of DVD play , cue points, loop points, and hot-cue points are shown as thumbnail displays overlain on the main output making possible interactive DJ operations. LEGA TO PRO The player is equipped with a digital filter that uses up-sampling technology (DVD: 48 kHz \ 192 kHz; CD: 44.1 kHz \ 176.4 kHz) for reproducing audio information lost in some disc (DVD, CD) for - mats. HI-BIT This function extends the bit length of audio data. By transform- ing 16-bit or 20-bit data to 24-bit, even minute signals can be reproduced with smooth, finely defined sound. DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT 96 kHz 24-bit digital audio output is supported in DJ mode as well as NORMAL mode. About DVD playback in DJ mode Since various special operations are supported in DJ mode, certain limitations are placed on normal playback functions such as SCAN. For this reason, operations which are possible in the NORMAL mode may be limited or disabled when attempted in DJ mode. In short, if you wish to use all ordinary DVD play functions, use the NORMAL mode. Limited or disabled functions (when in DJ mode) ö Cannot play sub-pictures (canâÂÂt display subtitles or onscreen but- tons) ö Cannot use password input command (when using interactive commands, the same operations may not produce the same results as when in NORMAL mode). ö May only play midway through titles. ö May skip certain parts of titles. ö Playback may be temporarily interrupted when switching audio functions. ö Playback may be temporarily interrupted when changing view- ing angle. ö Cannot use pan-and-scan function. ö The title itself may disallow use of DJ operations. In this case, DJ operations are prohibited, and the same operations are per - formed as when in NORMAL mode.
8 Before Operating (Handling Precautions) CUE DVJ-1000 Installation location ö Placing and using the player for long periods on heat-generat- ing sources such as amplifiers or near spotlights, etc. will af- fect product performance. A void placing the player on heat- generating sources. ö Install this player as far as possible away from tuners and TV sets. The player installed in close proximity to such equip- ment may cause noise or degradation of the picture. Noise may be noticeable when an indoor antenna is used. In such cases, make use of an outdoor antenna or turn off power to the player . ö When the unit is used in a loud-sound environment, e.g., near a speaker , sound skip may occur . Install the unit away from the speaker or reduce the listening volume. ö Place this unit on a level surface and a stable platform. T ake adequate note of the following precautions when pre- paring a place for installation: Be sure the player , including its video, audio and power supply cords, does not touch vibrating materials. Any vibration other than that transmitted through the insulators may cause the disc to skip. T ake special care when using the player while it is in- stalled in a carrying case. Do not place on or against vibrating materials! Leave space to allow for heat dissipation. Leave space to allow for heat dissipation. Leave space to allow for heat dissipation. Moving the unit â Never move the unit during playback! During playback, a disc rotates at very high speed; moving the player during playback may result in scratches or other damage to the disc. â When moving the unit is necessary Before moving the unit, remove any disc and disconnect the power . Malfunctions or damage may result if the unit is moved with a disc loaded. Also take care to prevent exposing the unit to heat or moisture during transport. About the carrying case The upper surface of the jog dial is equipped with a touch-sensi- tive switch. When placing the player in its carrying case, avoid placing any pressure on the jog dial. Condensation When this unit is brought into a warm room from previously cold surroundings or when the room temperature rises sharply , con- densation may form inside the unit and impair its performance. In such cases, disconnect the power cord and allow the unit to set for 1 to 2 hours, or raise the room temperature gradually before playing. Cleaning the player T o clean the player wipe with a polishing or a soft, dry cloth. For stubborn dirt, moisten a soft cloth with a weak solution of neu- tral detergent (diluted in five to six parts water), wring the cloth well, and wipe away the dirt. Use a dry cloth to wipe the surface dry . Do not use volatile liquids such as benzene or thinner which will damage the unit. About the lens cleaner The player's pickup lens should not become dirty in normal use. If for some reason, the lens becomes soiled and malfunctions, contact your nearest PIONEER authorized service center . Lens cleaners for DVD (CD) players are commercially available, but special care should be exercised in their use as some may cause damage to the lens. Regarding data recorded on memory cards It is the users responsibility to make regular backups of important memory card data. Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for damage to or loss of memory card data, or other incidental damages arising from incompatibilities of the player and memory card, static electric- ity or other external causes. Handling Precautions POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your near - est PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a re- placement. S002_En Lawful use of DVJ-1000: Copyright etc Neither Pioneer nor its dealers ar e r esponsible for the use made of the DVJ- 1000. The user must ensure it has all r elevant licences and consents in place (whether for copyright/public performance, performers rights, moral rights or other ewise) to allow the lawful use of the DVJ-1000. This is likely to include licences from or ganisations administering perform- ance rights in audio or video recor dings or consents from any other r elevant rights holders.
9 Before Operating (Discs Usable with This Unit) Discs Usable with This Unit T ypes of discs playable on this unit ö The following marks and logos are displayed on disc labels, packaging, or jackets. Note 1) About DVD-R disc playback: This player can play back DVD-R discs recorded in âÂÂDVD video â format or MP3. Note 2) About DVD-RW disc playback: ö This player can play back DVD-RW discs recorded in â DVD video â format or MP3. ö When playing a disc that has been edited on a DVD recorder , portions of the recording including links between tracks may appear as a momentary still image. ö When playing a disc that has been recorded or edited on a DVD recorder , the locations of edited portions may shift some- what. * For details, consult the Operating Instructions for your recorder . Note 3) Regarding CD-TEXT display: The number of characters that can be displayed is up to 72 for disc title, and 48 for track titles. Displays of 15 characters or more will scroll. Only alpha-numerics and a limited number of symbols can be displayed. Note 4) CD-R/CD-RW discs: This player supports playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded in audio CD format or MP3. * For details, consult the Operating Instructions for your recorder . When playing 8 cm CDs, always use an 8 cm CD adapter ( â P . 35). â The following discs cannot be played on this unit: ö DVD video discs not marketed for region â 1â or â ALLâ ö DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format ö DVD audio discs ö DVD-ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW discs containing no MP3 files ö DVD-RAM ö Video CDs ö CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW discs containing no MP3 files ö Photo CD ö DTS-CD, etc. Notes: ö Some DVD-R/DVD-RW and CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on standalone recorders or computer drives may not be playable back on this player , due to a variety of reasons, including disc characteristics, scratches, dirt, player lens dirt or condensa- tion, etc. ö Some discs recorded on computer drives may not be playable on this player , depending on the recording application used, its settings, and operating environment. Be sure to use the correct formatting for the discs used. For details, consult the application author . ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in video format unless they have been finalized. ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format. ö This unit cannot play partially recorded CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been finalized. ö For detailed information regarding the handling of DVD-R/DVD- RW and CD-R/CD-RW discs, consult the handling precautions printed on the disc case or otherwise supplied with each disc. â Regarding copy-control CDs This unit is designed to conform with audio CD standards. Op- eration is not guaranteed when playing CDs produced outside the normal CD standards. â About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content â video, audio, etc. â while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play . The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play . For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer . â Regarding DVD-R/DVD-RW , CD-R/CD-RW discs Due to the unique construction of DVD-R/DVD-RW and CD-R/ CD-RW discs, leaving them for extended periods of time in the pause (or cue standby) mode at a single point may result in the discs â becoming difficult to play at that place. The same symp- tom may also occur if the loop function is used to play back a single point on the disc excessively . As a result, users are advised to construct backup archive discs when playing discs containing important data. T ypes and Logos of playable discs DVD video DVD-R (Note 1) DVD-RW (Note 2) CD CD-TEXT (Note 3) CD-R (Note 4) CD-RW (Note 4) Note: This player does not support playback of 8 cm DVDs. Do not attempt to use adapters meant for 8 cm CDs, since the adapter may come loose during rotation, causing damage to the disc or player . is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
10 Before Operating (Discs Usable with This Unit) DVD operating limitations Some DVDs are designed explicitly to prevent the use of certain operations or to prevent changing operation methods. As a re- sult, the methods used to operate each disc may vary , and some techniques may not be usable with certain discs. In the event that a prohibited technique is attempted with a disc on this player , the display will show the disc operation prohibited mark . Also, certain other operations may not be supported on discs that sup- port menus or dialogue-type operations during playback. In such cases, the player operation prohibited mark will be displayed. Regarding copyright ö Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance, or rental of copyrighted discs is prohibited by law . ö This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Cor - poration, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Cor - poration. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Playing MP3 files MP3 files must follow the format requirements listed below. * This unit is not equipped with a sort function allowing playback by order of file names or ID3 tags. Playback is performed in the order tracks are recorded on the disc. * Plays MP3 files stored on CD or DVD. Cannot play MP3 files stored on SD memory cards or Multimedia cards (MMC). * Startup time increases with the number of folders. MP3 format Disc format MPEG-1 MPEG-2 ID3 tag File extension Folder levels Maximum number of folders Maximum number of files CD-R/CD-RW recording mode DVD-R/DVD-RW recording mode Supports Audio Layer-3 sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, Bit Rate 32 Kbps to 320 Kbps. Supports Audio Layer-3 sampling frequency 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, Bit Rate 16 Kbps (stereo) to 160 Kbps. Supports ID3 Vers. 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4. Displays title, artist, album. .mp3, .MP3, .mP3, .Mp3 Maximum of 8 folders. Files located in folders exceeding 8 levels cannot be played. 99 (99 folders 1 root) 999 (per folder) Record in accordance with ISO9660 file system standards. Supports only Disc At Once or Track At Once. DVJ-1000 does not support Packet Write recorded discs. Record in accordance with ISO9660 file system standards. Does not support multi-border recording. Mark Meaning Number of recorded audio tracks Number of recorded subtitles Number of recorded angles Recorded aspect ratio Region number . This player can play discs marked with region â 1â or â ALLâ . 2 2 3 16 : 9 LB 1 ALL Marks displayed on DVD The following symbols and marks may be displayed on DVD la- bels or packaging:
11 Before Operating (Discs Usable with This Unit) Disc composition Digital V ersatile Discs (DVD) DVD video, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs are recorded in units called â titles,â with each title being divided into one or more sub-divi- sions called â chapters.â Further , some, discs are furnished with menus for navigating the disc, but menus may not be included with all titles. In the case of commercial films, a single movie normally corresponds to a single title. On so-called â karaokeâ discs, each song track composes a single title, although there are some exceptions to this rule, so care is needed when using search functions. Compact Discs (CD) In the case of compact discs, each disc is divided into units of individual tracks (normally , each song is contained on a single track). In addition, tracks may have sub-divisions called index numbers. T itle 1 Title 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 DVD/DVD-R/DVD-RW T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 4 T rack 5 CD Handling discs â When holding discs, do not touch their signal surfaces. Hold by the edges, or by one edge and the center hole. â Do not affix gummed labels or tape to the disc surface. Also, do not scratch or damage the label. â Discs rotate at high speeds inside the player . Do not use dam- aged, cracked or warped discs. â Do not play a disc with a special shape ö Do not play a disc having other shape than a circular disc, such as heart shaped disc. Otherwise malfunction may occur . â Storing discs ö Discs are made of the same kinds of plastic used for con- ventional analog audio records. Be careful not to allow discs to warp. Always store discs in their cases vertically , avoiding locations with high heat, humidity , or extremely low tem- peratures. A void leaving discs in cars; the interior of a car in direct sunlight can become extremely hot. ö Always read and abide by the precautionary notes listed on disc labels. â Cleaning discs ö Always keep your discs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer edge. ö When cleaning discs, the use of a commercial CD/DVD clean- ing kit is recommended. ö If a disc becomes very dirty, dampen a soft cloth with water , (be sure to wring it out well) and wipe the away dirt gently . Remove any water drops with another soft, dry cloth. ö Do not use record cleaning sprays or anti-static agents on discs. Never clean discs with benzene, thinner , or other volatile sol- vents or damage to the disc surface may result.
12 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Operation panel 1. POWER OFF ( â )/ON (_ ) switch Located on the rear panel. 2. Loop in/realtime cue/loop in point adjust button/indica- tor (IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST) Real time cue â P .40 Loop-in point input â P .44 Loop-in point adjust â P .44 3. Loop out/loop out point adjust button/indicator (OUT/OUT ADJUST) Loop-out point input â P .44 Loop-out point adjust â P .44 4. BACK & FORTH button â P .45 Use to switch between normal loop mode and back & forth loop mode. 5. Loop mode indicator â P .45 Lights during back & forth loop mode. 6. RELOOP/EXIT button/indicator â P .44 REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEA T ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLA Y DELETE MEMORY MENU T .MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/ST ART JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLA Y/PA USE D VJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV 12 3 56 7 8 13 12 11 46 47 48 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 37 38 39 40 41 42 31 43 24 14 53 52 51 50 54 9 4 49 10 17 20 16 19 15 18 23 22 21 45 44 55 56 36 35 34 33 7. 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button â P .45 ⢠4-Beat Loop When this button is pressed, loop play will be- gin with that point as the loop-in point, and the loop-out automatically point set 4 beats later . ⢠One-T rack Loop When this button is held depressed for 1 sec- ond or more, the chapter loop or track loop play will begin. 8. CUE/LOOP CALL button â P .48 Press to turn cue point navigation mode ON/ OFF . 9. Cursor button ( / / / ) This button is used for cue point navigation; during MP3 playback, functions for performing selections with MP3 navigator , and for making various DVD settings. 10. ENTER button This button is used for cue point navigation; during MP3 playback, functions for performing selections with MP3 navigator , and for making various DVD settings. 11. NORMAL/DJ switch â P .18 Located on the rear panel. 12. STOP button Stops disc playback. When the eject/stop mode select switch is set to LOCK, playback will not stop unless the P AUSE mode is set first. 13. Eject/stop mode select switch (UNLOCK/LOCK) UNLOCK: If the EJECT ( 0 ) button is pressed during playback, the disc stops and is ejected. If the STOP button is pressed during playback, the disc playback stops. LOCK: If the EJECT ( 0 ) button is pressed dur - ing playback, the disc will not be ejected. T o eject the disc, set the unit to pause, then press the EJECT ( 0 ) button. Likewise, playback will not stop if the STOP button is pressed during playback; to stop disc playback, set the unit to pause, then press the STOP button. 14. EJECT ( 0 ) button When this button is pressed, disc rotation stops and the disc is ejected from the loading slot. If Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to NORMAL. Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to DJ. the eject/stop mode select switch is set to the LOCK position, the disc will not be ejected unless the unit is set to pause before press- ing the EJECT ( 0) button ( â P .35). 15. TOUCH/BRAKE response dial Adjusts the disc deceleration speed (time to playback stop) when the jog dialâ s top surface is touched with jog mode set to VINYL ON. Rotate the dial counterclockwise to stop playback quickly , and rotate dial clockwise to cause slower deceleration. 16. RELEASE/ST AR T response dial Adjusts the disc acceleration speed (playback startup time) when the jog dialâ s top surface is released with jog mode set to VINYL ON. Rotate the dial counterclockwise to restart playback quickly , and ro- tate dial clockwise to cause slower acceleration. 17. JOG ADJUST dial Use to adjust the felt resistance (light/heavy) of the jog dial when it is rotated. 18. HYPERJOG MODE button/indicator When hyper jog mode is set to ON with jog mode set to VINYL ON, turning the jog dial causes the rate of change of image and sound to increase to 4x the rate of changed normally produced (when the hyper jog mode is OFF). Names and Functions of Parts
13 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) 19. JOG MODE select button Each time pressed, sets VINYL mode alternately ON/OFF . VINYL mode ON : If surface of jog dial is touched during playback, playback stops, and if the dial is then rotated, image and sound are output in response to the amount of rotation. (if the angled surface of the jog dial is rotated without touching the top, pitch bend opera- tion is enabled.) ö The current jog mode is memorized even when power is turned off. VINYL mode OFF: The above operations are disabled even when the jog dial â s surface is touched. 20. VINYL mode indicator Lights when the jog mode is set to VINYL mode. 21. TEMPO control range select button Each time this button is pressed, the TEMPO control slider â s vari- able range changes (ñ6 %, ñ10 %, ñ16 %, WIDE). When WIDE is selected, the variable range during DVD and MP3 play- back is set to 70 % to âÂÂ100 %, and during CD playback, ñ100 %. 22. TEMPO control range indicator (ñ6, ñ10, ñ16, WIDE) ö When control range is set to ñ6 %, the ñ6 indicator lights. ö When control range is set to ñ10 %, the ñ6 and ñ10 indicators light. ö When control range is set to ñ16 %, the ñ6 , ñ10 and ñ16 indica- tors light. ö When control range is set to WIDE, the ñ6 , ñ10 , ñ16 and WIDE indicators light. 23. MASTER TEMPO button/indicator â P .41 Each time this button is pressed, the master tempo function turns alternately ON/OFF . 24. TEMPO control slider When pulled forward ( ), playback tempo is accelerated, and when pushed away ( âÂÂ), tempo is slowed. 25. TEMPO RESET indicator When lighted, indicates that the playback tempo is set to normal tempo â 0â , regardless of the position of the TEMPO control slider . 26. TEMPO RESET button Pressing this button instantly resets the playback tempo to â 0â (nor - mal tempo), regardless of the current position of the TEMPO control slider . Press the button once again to cancel the reset. 27. Jog dial display â P .15 28. Jog dial ( FWD/ â REV) â P .41 29. Disc loading slot â P .35 30. Forced eject hole â P .35 31. Memor y card door and slot â P .47 32. Memor y card indicator â P .47 This indicator lights with a memory card is loaded and the door is closed, and flashes during memory card access. ö Do not open the door or turn off power while the indicator is flash- ing. 33. PLA Y/P AUSE indicator Lights during playback, and flashes during pause mode. 34. PLA Y/P AUSE ( 3 /8) button â P .37 35. CUE indicator â P .40 Lights to indicate a cue point has been set. Flashes during pause mode. 36. CUE button â P .40 Cue point setting Back cue Cue point sampler 37. Manual search buttons (REV 1 /FWDá ) â P .38 38. T rack search buttons (PREVIOUS 4/NEXT â) â P .39 Use to return/advance playback by track (during CD, MP3) or chapter (during DVD). During DVD playback, use to return to menu page or change page. 39. REV indicator Lights when DIRECTION FWD/REV select switch is set to reverse. 40. DIRECTION FWD/REV select switch Set to REV position for reverse playback. 41. HOT CUE REC MODE button â P .43 Press to select the HOT CUE button â s function (record/call). ö Defaults to call mode when power is switched on. 42. HOT CUE (A, B, C) buttons/indicators â P .43 A, B, or C indicator lights red to indicate hot cue point record mode. A, B, or C indicator lights green for hot cue point, and orange for hot loop point; when an indicator is lighted, call mode is enabled for that point; pressing the button initiates playback from the hot cue point. When indicator is not lighted, no hot cue point is recorded. 43. T itle/folder search buttons (DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ ) â P .39 During DVD playback, titles are forwarded or reversed in the direc- tion corresponding to the button pressed. During MP3 playback, goes in designated direction for folders in lay- ered CD or DVD. 44. TEXT MODE select button â P .42 Each time this button is pressed, the display alternates between W A VE and TEXT (track name/album name/artist name). 45. TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button TIME MODE: Each time the button is pressed, the time display switches alter - nately between playback elapsed time and remaining time (REMAIN). In the case of MP3, the remaining playtime (REMAIN) may not im- mediately be displayed, depending on the file. ö The time mode remains set in memory even when power is turned off. AUTO CUE: Hold depressed for one second or more to set/release the auto cue function. Hold depressed for five seconds or more to switch the auto cue level ( â P .37). ö The auto cue ON/OFF setting and auto cue level remains set in memory even when power is turned off. 46. ANGLE button Press to change the viewing angle during DVD playback (on sup- ported discs only). ö In DJ mode, when the angle is changed both video and audio playback temporarily stop (due to writing to buffer memory). 47. SUBTITLE button During DVD playback, press to alternately turn subtitle display ON/ OFF (on supported discs only). ö This function is disabled in DJ mode. 48. AUDIO button During DVD playback, press this button to change language or audio channel (on supported discs only). ö In DJ mode, when the language/audio channel is changed, both video and audio playback temporarily stop (due to writing to buffer memory). 49. Display â P .14 ( 1 to 24 ) 50. DISPLA Y button â P .46 When pressed in DJ mode, turns the hot cue, cue point, and play- back time guide display ON/OFF on the monitor connected to the preview video output connector . When pressed in NORMAL mode, turns the disc information guide display ON/OFF . ö When power is switched ON, the display function defaults to ON when the unit is in the DJ mode, and OFF (no display) in the NOR- MAL mode. 51. DELETE button â P .50 Press to delete cue points and loop points recorded in memory card. 52. MEMORY button â P .47 Press to store cue points or loop points in memory card. 53. MENU button Press to display DVD menu. Also, during MP3 playback, displays MP3 navigator screen. ( â P .46) 54. T op menu (T .MENU) button Press to display a DVD â s top menu level. 55. SETUP button â P .21 Press to display the setup menu. 56. RETURN button When setup or other menus are displayed, press this button to re- turn to the previous menu or item.
14 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) 12 3 24 17 45 6 7 8 14 12 13 9 10 11 16 15 19 23 18 20 21 22 Display 1. T itle/Folder number display (TITLE/FLD 00 to 99) Indicates the DVD title number . During MP3 playback, displays folder number . Not displayed during CD playback. 2. Chapter number (CHP 000 to 999) Indicates the DVD chapter number . During CD/MP3 playback, â CHPâ does not appear . 3. T rack number (TRACK 00 to 99/000 to 999 (MP3)) Indicates CD or MP3 track number . â TRACKâ is not displayed during DVD playback. 4. T otal track number (ALL) When playing DVD, displays the total number of chapters within the title. When playing an audio CD, displays the total number of tracks on the disc. When playing MP3, displays the total number of tracks within the folder . 5. Auto cue (A.CUE) indicator Lights when auto cue is ON. Does not light during NORMAL mode. 6. Remaining time (REMAIN) indicator Indicates that the current numerical display is of a track â s remaining time. 7. Minutes display (000 to 999 M) 8. Seconds display (00 to 59 S) 9. Frame display (00 to 74 F) Display audio frame numbers. 75 frames are equivalent to one sec- ond of normal play . Not displayed in NORMAL mode. 10. Video frame display (00 to 29 VIDEO F) Lights during DVD playback in DJ mode. 30 frames are equivalent to one second. Video frame display does not appear during CD play- back and in NORMAL mode. Since this unit controls video frames (1/30 second) based on the audio frame (1/75 second), combining the two will result in a maxi- mum deviation of 1. 11. TEMPO indicator Displays tempo variation produced when TEMPO control slider is operated. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 12. T empo control range display (ñ6, ñ10, ñ16, WIDE) Lights to indicate the TEMPO control slider â s variable range as se- lected with the tempo control range select button. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 13. BPM counter display Lights to indicate the beats per minute (BPM) of the currently play- ing track. Some tracks may not be measurable with the automatic BPM counter . Does not light in NORMAL mode. 14. Master tempo indicator (MT) Lights when master tempo function is ON. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 15. Dot matrix display (100x7 dots) Used for displaying various items, including TEXT , W A VE, guide, etc. During CD TEXT display , shows up to 72 characters for disc title or up to 48 characters for track title; for MP3, displays up to 48 charac- ters (display scrolls when 15 or more characters are to be shown). In the case of W A VE display , the varying volume levels of the cur - rently playing track are displayed, with the track sized to fit into the entire 100-dot display width. For guide messages, see P .54 â Dot Matrix Guide Display Mes- sages â . 16. Play address display Displays a bar graph to allow an immediate visual grasp of the elapsed and remaining playing time of the currently playing track. The full scale bar length indicates the full track length. ö The bar graph is off at the beginning of the track, and lights from left to right. ö The bar graph is lighted at the beginning of the track, and goes out from left to right. ö When the remaining playing time falls below 30 seconds, the bar graph flashes slowly; when less than 15 seconds are left, the bar graph flashes quickly . 17. Prohibited indicator ( ) Some DVD discs or players do not support certain functions or op- erations; if an effort is made to perform such operations, this indica- tor appears for about 2 seconds. 18. CUE point indicator When a point is recorded in the CUE button or IN/REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST button for the currently selected track, the â CUEâ indi- cator lights and the point â s relative starting position is shown in the display (2 lighted dots). Does not light in NORMAL mode. 19. MEMORY display If the currently selected track includes cue memory or loop memory , the â MEMORYâ indicator lights and the MEMOR Y display indicates the relative starting position of the cue or loop. T wo dots are used to display 1 point, and even if multiple starting positions are included within a single point, only one point is displayed. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 20. SRS indicator ( ) Lights when T ruSurround function is selected. This function is disa- bled in DJ mode. 21. Dolby Digital indicator ( 2 D) Lights during playback when Dolby Digital audio has been selected. 22. DTS indicator Lights during playback when DTS audio has been selected. Not supported in DJ mode. 23. Video out indicators (VIDEO OUT/P AL/NTSC) When the video output TV system is set to AUTO, only the â VIDEO OUT â indicator lights. When NTSC has been selected, both the â VIDEO OUT â and â NTSC â indicators light. When P AL has been selected, both the â VIDEO OUT â and â PA L â indicators light. 24. Angle indicator ( ) During DVD playback, this mark appears to indicate a scene with variable angle.
15 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT POWER OFF ON AC IN S S 1 2 5 67 8 9 3 4 Rear panel 1. POWER OFF ( â )/ON (_ ) switch 2. NORMAL/DJ switch ( â P .18) If this switch position is changed during playback, playback will stop, and then resume playback from the disc â s begin- ning. DJ: For jog dial, tempo variation and other DJ operations. During DVD playback, subtitles and some other functions, operations, or playback points may not be supported. NORMAL: DJ functions are not supported. Pause mode is silent, not audible. During DVD playback, selected audio sig- nals are output from the digital output connectors. During CD playback, digital data containing subcodes are output (does not support CD graphics). 3. CONTROL connector Using the supplied accessory control cord, this connector can be connected to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately) to al- low control of this unit from the DJ mixer . This facilitates the use of functions such as fader start play and back cue. Alternately , linking this connector to another DJ player allows automatic relay play ( â P .45). 4. AUDIO OUT L/R connectors RCA type analog audio output connectors. 5. Main video output connectors (VIDEO OUT) Includes RCA and BNC type connectors for outputting DVD playback video only (composite signals), as well as S-Video output connector . 6. DIGIT AL OUT connector RCA type coaxial digital output, for connecting A V amplifier , Dolby Digital/DTS decoder , CD recorder , etc. When NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â DJâÂÂ, during DVD play- back the unit outputs 2-channel linear PCM digital data, re- gardless of the selected audio signal format. During CD play- back, the unit outputs only audio data that do not include subcodes. When NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâ , during DVD playback the unit outputs digital data in the audio signal for - mat selected. During CD playback, the unit outputs digital data including subcodes. 7. Preview video output connectors (PREVIEW OUT) RCA type connector (composite signals) and S-Video output connector . These connectors output monitor images used to aid the DJ during operation. Outputs various guide messages and displays ( â P .16). 8. SYNC IN connector BNC type input connector for inputting external sync signal. Use to connect optional dedicated sync signal generator . 9. AC inlet (AC IN) Use auxiliary power cord to connect to standard electrical outlet. Jog dial display 1. Operation display Displays play position, with one revolution equivalent to 135 frames. The display rotates during playback, and stops during pause. 2. Cue point position display Displays the position of cue points. 3. Audio/video memory status display Flashes during writing to the audio/video memory . While indicator is flashing, it may not be possible to record real time cue points or hot cue points. 4. Jog touch detector indicator When VINYL mode is set to ON, this indicator lights when the top panel of the jog dial is touched. 5. VINYL mode indicator (Vinyl) Lights when VINYL mode is set to ON. 1 2 3 4 5
16 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Play REV 1 âÂÂ010 3. 45. 67/ 4. 56 CUE C B A VIDEO OUT PREVIEW OUT Guide display area Angle indicator Title number , chapter number Area for onscreen display of thumbnail images of points recorded in HOT CUE and CUE buttons. In reverse mode displays â REVâ indicator â Prohibitedâ mark and other indicators T otal time in chapter (min- utes / seconds) Chapter contents are displayed as minutes, seconds, and frames. When time mode is set to REMAIN, dis- played numbers are preceded with a â minusâ (âÂÂ) sym- bol, for example, âÂÂâ 1.10.08â . Status indicator Play: Normal playback Loop: Loop playback Cue: Cue standby Pause: Normal pause (standby) Scratch: Scratch operation Search: Chapter/track search á : Forward search (scan) 1 : Reverse search (scan) Reading: Recall hot cue, or cue point Main video output (VIDEO OUT) and preview video output (PREVIEW OUT) â The example shown here is an illustration meant to depict the general display contents, and may differ somewhat from actual mon itor appearance. This unit is equipped with both main video output ( VIDEO OUT) and preview video output ( PREVIEW OUT) connectors. In NORMAL mode, both VIDEO OUT and PREVIEW OUT produce the same video signals. In DJ mode, the outputs of the two connectors are different, as indicated below . Even in DJ mode, however , if a non-supported D J operation is attempted, the outputs will be the same as in NORMAL mode. â VIDEO OUT This outputs only the DVD playback image; it should be connected to the main publicly viewed monitor . â PREVIEW OUT This outputs the images used by the DJ when operating the unit, and includes various additional guide messages and menus. W A VE Display: Displays relative music levels of entire track spread over full scale length. Playing address display: The current relative point in track playback is displayed as a bar graph, with entire track length spread over full scale length, thus allowing immedi- ate visual grasp of the current playback position in the track. PREVIEW OUT (for MP3) PREVIEW OUT (for CD)
17 Before Operating (Connections) Before Operating (Connections) SIGNAL GND DIGITAL CD DIGITAL CD PHONO CONTROL CD L R LINE CONTROL CD L R DIGIT AL IN DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S S S B DJM-800 A DVJ-1000 DVJ-1000 Connections Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet. 1. Connections to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately) (audio output and control connector) Using the accessory audio cable, connect the white plug to the L (left) connector , and connect the red plug to the R (right) co nnector . By connecting the accessory control cord, the player can be controlled from the mixer , allowing fader start play and back cue o perations. Note that digital connections can be made only with mixers equipped with digital input connectors (models DJM-800, DJM-1000, et c.). Use a commercially available coaxial digital cable to connect this unitâ s DIGIT AL OUT connector to the DJ mixerâ s DIGIT AL IN co nnec- tor . Connection example DJM-800: Accessory audio cable Accessory control cord ö When making connections to the DJM-1000, the furnished audio cables can be used to connect one set of the CD/LINE connectors to player A, and the other set of CD/LINE connectors to a second player B. When making digital audio connections, a commerciall y available coaxial digital signal cable must be used to connect this unitâ s DIGIT AL OUT connector to one of the DIGIT AL IN conne c- tors (3 to 6) of the DJM-1000 mixer . ö When connecting to the DJM-600, DJM-500, or DJM-300, use the furnished audio cables to connect the CD1 connectors to player A, and CD2 connectors to player B. ö When connecting to DJM-909, DJM-707 or DJM-400 use the furnished audio cables to connect the CH-1 CD connectors to player A, and CH-2 CD connectors to player B. ö When connecting to DJM-3000, connect player A to CH-1 LINE 1, and player B to CH-2 LINE 3. ö When connecting this unit to other audio mixers, connect the unit â s AUDIO OUT connectors to the mixerâ s LINE IN or AUX IN connectors. ( â DO NOT connect to the PHONO connectors, since it may result in distorted sound or improper playback.) Coaxial digital cable (sold separately)
18 Before Operating (Connections) 3. Connection to stereo amplifier (without DJ mixer) 4. Connection to component equipped with digital input connector â Setting the NORMAL/DJ switch (rear panel) When the unit is used normally as a DJ DVD player , the mode select switch should be set to the â DJâ position. If the switch position is changed during playback, playback will stop and after the stop, playback will begin from the beginning of the disc. When set to DJ (DJ mode): ö During DVD playback, the digital output connectors produce 2-channel linear PCM digital data, regardless of the selected audio signal format. In addition, subtitles and certain other functions and operations are not supported. ö During CD playback, the digital connector outputs only audio data without sub-codes. However , sampling frequency is fixed at 44 .1 kHz. As a result, limitations of recording or other functions may be experienced when certain CD recorders or other components are connected. For details, consult the Operating Instructions for the component to be connected. ö Some functions may be limited or disabled during DVD playback ( â P .7, â About DVD playback in DJ mode â ). When set to NORMAL (NORMAL mode): ö The digital connector outputs digital data including sub-codes, but the player â s DJ functions are disabled. ö When unsupported operations are attempted the message â NORMALâ will appear in the display . ö When power is turned ON, if the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL â , the display shows the message âÂÂNORMAL â . ö If you wish to use all ordinary functions during DVD playback, set the unit to NORMAL mode ( â P .7, â About DVD playback in DJ mode â ). Connect CD or AUX input connector (do not connect to PHONO input connector) Accessory audio cable Stereo amplifier CD recorder or amplifier with digital input connector , etc. Coaxial digital cable (sold separately) 2. Control cord connection for relay play By using the accessory control cord to connect two DJ players, automatic relay play can be performed between the two units. ( â P .45) DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT POWER OFF ON AC IN DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT POWER OFF ON AC IN S S S S DVJ-1000 DVJ-1000 Accessory control cord DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S DVJ-1000 DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S DVJ-1000
19 Before Operating (Connections) Before Operating (Connections) DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT DVJ-1000 5. Connection to television monitor (composite video/S-V ideo) This player is equipped with two video output connectors: a main video output connector ( VIDEO OUT) which outputs only the DVD playback image, and a preview video output connector ( PREVIEW OUT) which produces a variety of data displays used by the DJ during a performance. ö Each of the television monitors is connected by using standard video cables (RCA plug) or S-Video cables. ö The main video output is also equipped with a BNC type output connector ( COMPOSITE ), allowing the use of a BNC connector cable if desired. * Only one video cable is provided as an accessory . S-Video cables and BNC connector cables are not provided. â Connect the playerâ s video output dir ectly to a television monitor , not to a video deck (if connected through a video deck, the copy guard function may prevent proper playback). Main monitor BNC connector cable S-Video cable S-Video cable Video cable Video cable Preview monitor Note: Most DJ functions (cue, loop, reloop, tempo adjust, hot cue, jog dial, reverse play) are not supported when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâÂÂ. In addition, the pause mode is silent, not audible.
20 Before Operating (Connections) 6. Connection to video mixer Use a standard video cable (RCA plug) or S-V ideo cable for these connections. 7. Connecting the power cord After all other connections are completed, connect one end of the accessory power cord to the rear -panel AC inlet, and connect the other end (power plug) to a wall outlet. DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S S S S DVJ-1000 B VIDEO INPUT 1 S S VIDEO INPUT 2 VIDEO OUTPUT DVJ-1000 A VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT Video cable Main monitor Video mixer Preview monitor Preview monitor S-Video cable S-Video cable S-Video cable S-Video cable S-Video cable Video cable Video cable Video cable Video cable
21 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Setup Initial setup is required before playing DVDs. TV system setting for video output This setting is used to switch the TV system used for video out- put. Confirm on the following table the TV system format in which each kind of disc will be output. Using the Setup Navigator The â Setup Navigatorâ uses a dialog format to make basic tel- evision and amplifier settings. The various settings are made au- tomatically as the user responds to displayed questions. The Setup Navigator function cannot be used during playback. When Setup Navigator is started, setup questions appear in the following order: Language (OSD Language) \ TV Connection (TV type) \ Amp Connection 1. Set POWER switch to ON. If a disc is already loaded, remove it. 2. Press SETUP button. The Setup Navigator screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Setup using the Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Auto Start Off SETUP ENTER Start: Select to begin the Setup Navigator . Auto Start Off: Select if Setup Navigator settings are already completed. ö When [ Auto Start Off] is selected, the next time the SETUP button is pressed the manual Setup Menu will appear . 3. Press ENTER button. The Setup Navigator is initiated. â During setup, to return to the previous menu screen: Press the cursor buttonâ s left side ( ). Select On-Screen-Display (OSD) Language Languages selectable include English, French, German, Italian, or Spanish. Press the cursor buttonâ s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the language desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Select the On Screen Language Setup Navigator OSD Language Language English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol SETUP ENTER English: OSD Language is English. Fran çais: OSD Language is French. Deutsch: OSD Language is German. Italiano: OSD Language is Italian. Espa ñol: OSD Language is Spanish. ö The language selected as the OSD Language is automatically selected as the language used in subtitles and audio. ( â P . 30) FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT DVJ-1000 ENTER OP MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAK RELEASE/ST A JOG ADJUST 1. Set the player â s POWER switch to OFF . 2. While depressing the DVD TITLE \ button, set the power to ON. 3. Release the DVD TITLE \ button once the TV system is shown in the display . Each time steps 1 to 3 are repeated, the setting alternates as follows: NTSC (factory default) = PA L P AL = AUTO AUTO = NTSC ö Note that visual quality may deteriorate if the discâ s record- ing method differs from the TV system selected for out- put. How to perform setup Setup operations are performed by first pressing the SETUP button to display the Setup Menu on the screen; the cursor but- ton is used to select items, and items are confirmed with the ENTER button. The cursor button contains four sensors ( / / / ) in a single button. Press the top ( ), bottom ( ), left ( ) and right ( ) sides of the button to move in the corresponding directions on the screen. Settings are performed via a â Setup Navigatorâ which uses a dialog format to make basic settings of television and amplifier; a â Setup Menu Modeâ is used for individual settings. First press the SETUP button to start the â Setup NavigatorâÂÂ. â Setup Menu Mode â includes â Basic â and â Expert âÂÂ; the latter mode allows more detailed settings. Player setting Disc type DVD (NTSC) DVD (P AL) CD or no disc AUTO mode NTSC PA L NTSC or P AL NTSC mode NTSC NTSC NTSC P AL mode PA L PA L PA L
22 Preparations (Setup) Select type of television connected Sets the type of television connected to the player . Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Widescreen TV 16:9 aspect ratio Setup Navigator TV T ype TV Connection Widescreen(16:9) Standard(4:3) Widescreen(16:9): Select this option when connecting a television with Widescreen (16:9) aspect ratio. Standard(4:3): Select this option when connecting a television with conven- tional (4:3) aspect ratio. Select the type of digital signal supported by your amplifier â Digital output during DJ mode is automatically converted to linear PCM only . Set the type of digital signal supported by the amplifier connected to the player . (Consult the Operating Instructions for your ampli- fier when making this setting.) Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Compatible with Dolby Digital Setup Navigator Digital Jack Amp Connection Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/DTS Dolby Digital/MPEG Dolby D/DTS/MPEG PCM Not Connected SETUP ENTER Dolby Digital: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect a A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports the Dolby Digital format. Dolby Digital/DTS: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect an A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports Dolby Digital and DTS formats. Dolby Digital/MPEG: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect an A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports Dolby Digital and MPEG formats. Dolby D/DTS/MPEG: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect an A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG formats. PCM: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect a stereo or Dolby Pro Logic amplifier . Not Connected: Select this item if you have used the accessory analog audio cable to connected an amplifier , or if you do not know whether the amplifier supports digital signals. When this item is selected, the next setting [ 96kHz PCM Audio] is not required; skip it and go directly to [ Exit Setup Navigator ]. ö If your amplifier does not support DTS audio, do not select the [ Dolby Digital/DTS] or [ Dolby D/DTS/MPEG], since ad- ditional noise may occur . Select whether connected amplifier supports 96 kHz audio Set this item to reflect whether the connected amplifier sup- ports linear PCM 96 kHz audio. Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Digital jack not compatible with 96kHz Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Audio Amp Connection No Ye s Don't Know No: Connected amplifier does not support linear PCM 96 kHz audio. Y es: Connected amplifier does support linear PCM 96 kHz audio. Don â t Know: Select this item if you are unsure whether the connected ampli- fier supports linear PCM 96 kHz audio. ö If [ No ] or [Don â t Know ] is selected, DVD audio will be con- verted to 48 kHz for output, regardless of whether it is origi- nally linear PCM 96 kHz. Exit Setup Navigator Choices here include: to save the new settings and close Setup Navigator; to abandon (delete) the new settings and close Setup Navigator , or to start over without closing. Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Changes are saved Setup Navigator Exit Setup Navigator Save Changes Delete Changes Start Again Save Changes: The new settings will be saved and applied, and Setup Navigator will close. Delete Changes: New settings will be abandoned and Setup Navigator will close. Start Again: Setup Navigator will return to the [ OSD Language] and start settings again. ö If [ Save Changes] or [ Delete Changes] is chosen, the initial setup menu will close. ö If [ Start Again ] is selected, the display will return to the [ OSD Language ] menu screen.
23 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 V2 Video1 General A2 Language Audio1 Audio DRC Off On Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital PCM DTS Out Off DTS 96kHz PCM Out 96kHz 48kHz 96kHz MPEG Out MPEG MPEG PCM Digital Out On Off Background Pioneer Logo Black Video Adjust Start Still Picture Field Frame Auto On Screen Display On Off Angle Indicator On Off OSD Language English fran ç ais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñ ol Audio Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Auto Language On Off DVD Language w / Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Subtitle Display On Off Assist Subtitle Subtitle Off With Audio Selected Subtitle Setup Menu Mode Expert Basic Setup Navigator Start Parental Lock Password (Change) Level Country Code TV Screen 4 : 3(Letter Box) 4 : 3(Pan&Scan) 16 : 9(Wide) S-Video Out S1 S2 Screen Saver On Off Virtual Surround Off T ruSurround Legato PRO Off Standard Effect1 Effect2 Effect3 Hi-Bit On Off P .25 P .25 P .25 P .25 P .26 P .26 P .26 P .26 P .27 P .27 P .28 P .28 P .29 P .28 P .29 P .30 P .30 P .25 P .21 P .33 P .30 P .30 P .30 P .31 P .31 P .32 P .32 Setup Menu items Manual setup using the Setup Menu allows a greater variety of setup options than the Setup Navigator . Consult the pages Noted for more information about the contents of items and options listed on the menu. ö â indicates factory default values. ö settings are displayed in the Setup Menu â s [Expert] mode.
24 Preparations (Setup) T o return all settings to their factory defaults Use this command to return all changed settings to their factory default values. 1. T urn power OFF . 2. While holding the STOP button depressed, set the POWER switch to ON, and continue holding the STOP button until the âÂÂPOWER ON â indication goes off. ö All setting contents will be returned to their factory default values. The DJ mode functions listed below are set to the follow- ing factory defaults in addition to the items in the Setup Menu (P .23). Auto Cue: OFF Auto Cue level: â 60 dB Jog mode: VINYL ON T ime mode: REMAIN TV system setting for video output: NTSC â This command additionally erases all memory contents, in- cluding â video memor yâ ( â P .28). Be sure you wish to delete all memory contents before using this command. Using the Setup Menu â Setup menu functions are disabled during DVD playback in DJ mode, and during CD playback. Set the unit to stop, or remove the disc before attempting setup operations. The Setup Menu is used when you wish to modify the default factory settings. The following instructions introduce the basic operations and controls used with the Setup Menu. ö If you have not yet performed the basic setup using the Setup Navigator , the Setup Navigator screen will appear first. Confirm that power is turned ON, then 1. Press the SETUP button. The Setup Menu will appear . [Example] V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 â â â â â Off Dolby Digital Off 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG 3 PCM Setup audio Digital output format/tone adjust SETUP 2. Press the left and right sides of the cursor button ( / ) to move between the tags at the top of the menu ([Audio1], [Audio2], [Video1], [V ideo2], [Language], or [General]). 3. Use the upper and lower sides of the cursor button ( / ) to select the desired setting item. 4. Press the cursor button â s right side ( ) to move to the options list. 5. Use the upper and lower sides of the cursor button ( / ) to move between options. 6. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to modify other settings. T ags Usable operation buttons 7. Press the SETUP button. The Setup Menu will close. ö If the Setup Menu is opened again after you have previously made settings there, the previously shown menu screen will appear . â Disc-dependent settings Some setting changes are not supported, depending on the kind of disc (DVD/CD) used. Whether a desired setting is supported can be confirmed by viewing the indicator color at the left of the selected setting item. Consult the accompanying table for infor - mation regarding what settings are supported for each disc type. Changed settings become effective immediately . â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Setup disc's subtitle language SETUP Indicator Color Disc T ype Blue, Y ellow DVD only Green All â Items not changeable during playback Items that cannot be set during playback are displayed in grey . Perform this operation in the stop mode, or when no disc is loaded. Indicator â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English English English On Grey
25 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Advanced settings The Setup Menu includes two mode levels, [ Basic] and [ Expert ]; the [ Expert] mode allows more advanced settings. â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Expert Basic Off (us) Change menu mode SETUP Exit Move Expert: Displays advanced settings. Basic: Displays basic settings; simple explanations ( ) are displayed for the items selected (factory default settings). Adjusting Dolby Digital audio â Digital output during DJ mode is automatically converted to linear PCM only . This item allows adjustment of the dynamic range of digital sound. By adjusting the audio DRC (dynamic range compression), large- volume sounds can be attenuated and low-volume sounds can be enhanced for a variety of playback effects. This setting is ef- fective, for example, when it is difficult to hear dialog on a televi- sion program, or when you do not wish to disturb neighbors while watching movies late at night. ö See P .24 for menu instructions. â â â 96kHz 3 48kHz â MPEG 3 PCM V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off On Off Dynamic playback at low volume SETUP Off: Cancels Audio DRC. Allows maximum audio presence when used with high-fidelity speakers (factory default setting). On: Suppresses loud sounds (explosions, etc.) making it easier to understand dialog. ö Audio DRC is supported only when using Dolby Digital audio. ö Some discs may produce less effect. ö Audio DRC is also applied to audio produced from the digital output (coaxial) connectors. In this case, set [ Dolby Digital Out ] to [ Dolby Digital 3 PCM ], and set [Digital Out ] to [On ]. ö The effect produced with Audio DRC differs depending on the speakers used and the volume setting of the A V amplifier . T urn the setting ON/OFF while adjusting your sound volume so as to produce most effective results. Digital output setting â Digital output during DJ mode is automatically converted to linear PCM only . This item allows selection of the kind of digital signals supported by the connected amplifier . ö If this item is set incorrectly , unwanted noise may be pro- duced. ö Consult the Operating Instructions for your amplifier when making this setting. ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Dolby Digital output Set to [ Dolby Digital 3 PCM] when the connected amplifier does not supports Dolby Digital audio. â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Dolby Digital 3 PCM 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG 3 PCM Change Dolby Digital output mode SETUP Dolby Digital: Setting for amplifier or decoders supporting Dolby Digital audio (factory default setting). Dolby Digital 3 PCM: Dolby Digital signals are converted to linear PCM for output. Se- lect this setting when the connected amplifier does not support Dolby Digital audio. DTS output Set this item to [ DTS] when the connected amplifier supports DTS. â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off DTS MPEG 3 PCM Change DTS output mode SETUP Off: Select this item when the connected amplifier does not support DTS (factory default setting). DTS: Select this item when the connected amplifier or decoder sup- ports DTS. 96kHz PCM output Set this option to [ 96kHz] when the connected amplifier sup- ports 96 kHz output. â â â â SETUP V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off 96kHz 3 48kHz 96kHz Change 96kHz output mode 96kHz 3 48kHz: 96 kHz signals are converted to 48 kHz for output. Select this option when the connected amplifier does not support 96 kHz signals (factory default setting). 96kHz: Select this option if the connected amplifier or decoder supports 96 kHz output.
26 Preparations (Setup) MPEG output Set this option to [ MPEG] if the connected amplifier supports MPEG audio. â â â â â SETUP V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off MPEG MPEG 3 PCM Change MPEG audio output mode MPEG: Select this option if the connected amplifier or decoder supports MPEG audio. MPEG 3 PCM: MPEG signals are converted to linear PCM for output. Select this option if the connected amplifier does not support MPEG (factory default setting). Digital output ON/OFF (Expert Mode) This setting allows disabling of outputs from the digital audio output connectors. â â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG 3 PCM On Off SETUP On: Signals are output from the rear panel digital output connectors (factory default setting). Off: Signals are not output from the rear panel digital output connec- tors. [Audio2] settings ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Surround setting â This option is not supported in DJ mode. This function is supported only when connected to the audio output connectors. Not supported during use of DTS audio, lin- ear PCM 96 kHz audio. â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato Off T ruSurround Surround effect from 2 speakers SETUP Off: Disabled (factory default setting) T ruSurround: Select for virtual surround sound. ö If [ T ruSurround ] is selected during playback of DVD Dolby Digital 2ch discs, the audio level produced from the digital output connectors will be reduced. Also note that if the [ Audio1] menu item [ Dolby Digital Out ] is set to [ Dolby Digital 3 PCM] when playing discs other than those recorded in Dolby Digital 2ch format, selecting [ T ruSurround ] will cause audio output to be disabled from the digital output connectors. ö Some discs may produce less surround effect than others. Legato PRO function Select from among the four ambience modes based on your own preferences and the style of music being played. The char - acteristics of the four modes are as follows: Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Off Standard Effect1 Effect2 Effect3 SETUP Wide Range Digital filter Y ou can select the quality of sound. Off: Legato function disabled (factory default setting). Standard: Produces full-bodied sound presence. Effect1: Produces bright, vivid sound. Effect2: Produces sound with depth and reserve. Effect3: Produces sound with solid bass and balance. ö The Legato PRO function operates to change the audio digital filter response of those bands primarily outside the audio range. ö The amount of tonal change may vary , depending on the lis- tening room environment. â Supports Dolby *1 Digital / DTS *2 for genuine theater -like sound impact By connecting an amplifier supporting Dolby Digital/DTS, you can enjoy the immediacy and power of 5.1 channel movies and music DVDs. â Equipped with SRS T ruSurround (Virtual Surround) Recreates the ambience of 5.1 channel sound using only 2 speakers. SRS T ruSurround *3 technology performs direct processing of 5.1 channel digital sound data. *1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. â Dolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. *2 â DTS â and â DTS Digital Out â are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Sys- tems, Inc. *3 T ruSurround, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. T ruSurround technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
27 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Set the screen aspect ratio for the television Select the value matching the type of televi- sion connected. Select [ 16:9(Wide)] when a wide-screen television is connected. Most DVD movies are recorded to support wide television screens with an aspect of 16 hori- zontal to 9 vertical. As a result, when DVDs are viewed on conventional televisions, the image is projected at the television â s aspect ratio of 4:3, causing it to appear horizontally compressed. In order to eliminate this kind of distortion, set the aspect ratio either for [ 4:3 (Letter Box) ] or [ 4:3(Pan&Scan) ] when us- ing a conventional television. ö This setting cannot be changed during play- back. â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Component Video 4:3(Letter Box) 4:3(Pan&Scan) 16:9(Wide ) Select your display preference SETUP 4:3(Letter Box): Select this setting when using a conventional television and you wish to view movies in letterbox format. 4:3(Pan&Scan) : Select this setting when using a conventional television and you wish to view movies in â pan and scan â format. 16:9(Wide): Select this setting when using a widescreen (16:9) television (factory default setting) â The 4:3(Pan&Scan) format is not sup- ported in DJ mode. If [4:3(Pan&Scan)] is selected when the unit is in DJ mode, output will be in letterbox setting. ö Some DVDs do not support changing of aspect ratio. Consult the information printed on your disc â s jacket for more details. Hi-Bit function (Expert Mode) By converting 16-bit to 20-bit audio data to 24-bit, smooth, de- tailed sound quality is produced even at low listening levels. â â â SETUP Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Hi âÂÂBit Off Off On Off On: Hi-Bit function is enabled (factory default setting) Off: Hi-Bit function is disabled. ö In DJ mode, 24-bit processing is normally used, regardless of the setting selected. [V ideo1] settings â Aspect ratio formats [With conventional television set] DVD recording format Player Setting Viewing appearance 4:3(Letter Box) Black bands appear at top and bottom of screen; im- age is projected in correct aspect ratio. 4:3(Pan&Scan) Right/left sides of image are cut off, but image is projected in correct as- pect ratio. 16:9(Wide) Image is horizontally com- pressed (appears vertically stretched). If the image appears as shown here, set the playerâ s aspect ratio to [4:3 (LetterBox)] or [4:3 (Pan&Scan)]. All settings Appears with correct aspect ratio. 16:9 disc 4:3 disc DVD recording format Player Setting Viewing appearance [With widescreen television set] 16:9 disc 4:3 disc 16:9(Wide) 16:9(Wide) Appears with correct aspect ratio. Black bands may appear at top/bottom with some discs. Black bands appear at right/left, but image is projected in correct as- pect ratio. Image is vertically compressed (appears horizontally stretched) If the image appears as shown here, set the television setâ s aspect ratio âÂÂnormalâÂÂ. For details consult the Operating Instructions for your television set.
28 Preparations (Setup) Select S-Video output (Expert Mode) Set this option to select the video signal output from the S-V ideo connector . ö When the S-Video connector is used to connect the player to a television set, the image may appear vertically compressed (or stretched horizontally). In this case, select [ S1]. â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen S-Video Out Screen Saver 16:9(Wide) S1 S2 SETUP S2: The S2 video signal is output (factory default setting). S1: The S1 video signal is output. S1 Video Output: S1 is S-Video with added signal for discrimination of aspect ratio (4:3, 16:9). S2 Video Output: S2 is the S1 signal with the addition of another signal for dis- crimination of the picture viewing format (letter box, pan and scan). When played on a wide television supporting S2, the appropriate picture mode will be selected automatically . Screen Saver setting (Expert mode) The screen saver function is provided in order to prevent image burn (residual image) on a television screen when a single image is paused or otherwise remains on the screen for an extended period of time. ö When enabled, the screen saver function operates after an image has been displayed for about five minutes. â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen S-Video Out Screen Saver 16:9(Wide) S2 On Off SETUP On: Screen saver function is enabled (factory default setting). Off: Screen saver function is disabled. â In DJ mode, the screen saver function does not operate when the unit is in pause mode. Video quality adjust The video quality can be set to provide optimum reproduction of specific types of image (movies, animation, etc.). Further , each of the video image quality options can be set individually , and each setting can be recorded in memory . If playback is performed while displaying the initial setup menu, the picture quality can be adjusted while viewing the actual television image. T o select a preset picture quality 1. Using the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ), select [Video2] \ [Video Adjust] \ [Start]. â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Pioneer Logo Start Picture Quality Controls SETUP 2. Press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will appear . Video Memory Select Video Setup 3. Select [Video Memory Select] and press the ENTER button. Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Cinema Animation Standard 4. Use the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ) to select the desired preset picture quality . Standard: Reproduces the picture quality recorded on the disc as is. Cinema: Optimum for watching in a darkened room, to recreate the atmosphere of a movie theater . Animation: Produces bright, crisp colors, optimum for watching video ani- mation. Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Favorite picture quality settings can be recorded in memory , as described in the following section, â Adjusting picture quality â . 5. Press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will close.
29 INDEX Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Adjusting picture quality 1. Use the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ) to select [V ideo2] \ [Video Adjust] \ [Start], then press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will appear . 2. Use the cursor buttonâ s up/down sides ( / ) to select [Video Setup] and press the ENTER button. Video Memory Select Video Setup 3. Use the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to select the item you wish to adjust. DISPLA Y ENTER Fine Focus On Off Move Select Check When the DISPLA Y button is pressed, a submenu list of the selected adjustment items will be displayed. Press the DIS- PLA Y button once again to return to the previous menu. Memory Fine Focus Contrast Sharpness Chroma Level Hue On Off soft fine min max min max green red Off 1 2 3 Fine Focus: Set to [ On ] to reproduce high-resolution images. Contrast: Use to adjust the ratio between the brightest and darkest parts of the image. Sharpness: Use to adjust the image brightness with respect to the middle frequency range. This function is disabled when [ Fine Focus] is set to [ On ]. Chroma Level: Use to adjust the depth of color . This function is particularly ef- fective when watching heavily colored animations. Hue: Use to adjust the red-green balance. 4. Use the cursor button â s left/right sides ( / ) to adjust the selected item â s level. When setting [ Fine Focus], select between [ On] or [ Off ]. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all desired setting items. If you wish to record the selected settings in memory , use the cursor buttonâ s up/down sides ( / ) to select [ Memory], then use the cursor buttonâ s left/right ( / ) sides to select [ 1 ], [ 2 ], or [ 3 ] to record the combination of settings in the cor - responding memory space. ⢠If a combination of settings has previously been memo- rized in the selected memory space, the previous settings will be overwritten (erased) by the new settings. DISPLA Y ENTER Memory Move Select Off 1 2 3 Check 6. Press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will close. ⢠The effect of picture quality control changes may not appear as distinct with some DVDs and on some television sets. [V ideo2] settings ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Select Background Select the kind of background that appears when disc is stopped. â SETUP Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Pioneer Logo Black Put Background Selections Pioneer Logo: The Pioneer Logo mark appears as background when disc is stopped (factory default setting). Black: Background appears black when disc is stopped. Still Picture selection (Expert Mode) Use to eliminate image shaking when viewing still images (DVD pause mode), and produce a clearer picture. ö Some discs may not appear clearer even when [ Field ] is se- lected. â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Field Frame Auto SETUP Field: Eliminates shaking during still images. Frame: Normal mode. Auto: Switches automatically between [ Field] and [ Frame ] (factory de- fault setting). ö Automatically defaults to [ Auto ] in DJ mode.
30 Preparations (Setup) T urn on-screen display ON/OFF (Expert Mode) Sets player â s onscreen display ON/OFF . â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Auto On Off SETUP On: On-screen display is enabled (factory default setting). Off: On-screen display is disabled. Angle mark display (Expert Mode) Use this option to turn the on-screen angle indicator mark ON/OFF . In DJ mode, the preview image output angle indicator mark is turned ON/OFF using the DISPLA Y button, regardless of the setting of this option. â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Auto On On Off SETUP On: The angle indicator mark appears on screen (factory default setting). Off: The angle indicator mark does not appear on screen. [Language] settings Some DVDs include multiple subtitle and audio languages, al- lowing the user to select different languages as desired. This setting item allows the selection of such language and subtitle alternatives. ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Set the OSD Language Select the language used for Setup Menu and other on-screen displays (OSD). â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol Select the On Screen Language SETUP English: OSD Language is English. Fran çais: OSD Language is French. Deutsch: OSD Language is German. Italiano: OSD Language is Italian. Espa ñol: OSD Language is Spanish. ö In the DJ mode, the guide display language for preview im- ages, etc., is always English, regardless of the setting of this item. Select the Audio Language Select the language heard in audio channels. This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Setup audio language SETUP English: Audio Language is English. French: Audio Language is French. German: Audio Language is German. Italian: Audio Language is Italian. Spanish: Audio Language is Spanish. Other: Select from among 136 languages. For information on this item, see the section â â When Select- ing [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language â . Select the Subtitle Language Select the language you wish subtitles to appear in. This setting cannot be changed during playback. â No subtitles are displayed in DJ mode. â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Setup disc's subtitle language SETUP English: Subtitle Language is English. French: Subtitle Language is French. German: Subtitle Language is German. Italian: Subtitle Language is Italian. Spanish: Subtitle Language is Spanish. Other: Select from among 136 languages. For information on this item, see the section â â When Select- ing [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language â . ö If an attempt is made to select an Audio Language or Subtitle Language not actually recorded on the disc, the disc â s original language of recording will be selected automatically .
31 INDEX Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) â When selecting [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language Make this selection while looking at the â Language Code List â on P .32. If a language is selected that is not actually recorded on the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be used for the menu display . 1. Select [Other] and press the ENTER button. The Language selection menu will appear . (Example): T o set the Audio Language List of Language Code (0~2) en: English Setup audio language Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select â / Audio Language 05 1 4 ENTER SETUP RETURN 2. Select [List of Language] or [Code] Some languages are not displayed on the Code page. For details, see the â Language Code List â . ö The numbers listed in parentheses ( ) beside [ Code ] in- dicate the range of numbers possible. Use one of the following methods: â Select language using [Code] Use the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to select the desired number for each digit; use the cursor but- ton â s left/right sides ( / ) to move between digits. â Select language using [List of Language] (Example): T o select French Press the rear side ( ) of the cursor button twice. 3. Press the ENTER button. Automatic language and subtitle setting This function selects either automatic audio and subtitle language selection, or manual selection via the Setup Menu are used. This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English English English On Off Play dialog, etc. in original language Subtitle ON with foreign audio SETUP On: Enabled when [ Audio Language] and [ Subtitle Language] are the same, and when subtitle display is set to ON (factory default setting). Off: Automatic audio language setting is canceled; instead, the lan- guages set manually with [ Audio Language] and [ Subtitle Lan- guage ] are enabled. Set DVD menu language (Expert Mode) Many DVDs contain menus; this command allows selection of the menu display language, when available. ö This setting cannot be changed during playback. Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off w/ Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other SETUP w/Subtitle Language: The language selected in [ Subtitle Language] becomes the menu display language (factory default setting). English: Menu display Language is English. French: Menu display Language is French. German: Menu display Language is German. Italian: Menu display Language is Italian. Spanish: Menu display Language is Spanish. Other: Select from among 136 languages. For information on this item, see the section â â When Select- ing [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language â .
32 Preparations (Setup) Set Subtitle Display ON/OFF (Expert Mode) Select whether to turn subtitles ON, OFF , or to display assist subtitles. ö This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On On Off Assist Subtitle SETUP On: Subtitles are displayed normally (factory default setting). Off: Subtitles are not displayed. However , some DVDs have subti- tles that are displayed by default, regardless of this setting (see paragraph at right). Assist Subtitle: [ Assist Subtitle ] are subtitles that provide additional informa- tion about the current scene, for example descriptions of ambi- ent sounds for the hearing impaired. Select this option to display such assist subtitles. Note that assist subtitles are displayed only when they originally recorded on the DVD being played. Set language for forced subtitles (Expert Mode) On some DVDs, even when the [ Subtitle Display] is set to [ Off ], some subtitles may be displayed automatically . Use this com- mand to select the language used for such subtitles. ö This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On English With Audio Selected Subtitle SETUP With Audio: Display subtitles in the same language as the audio being played. Selected Subtitle: Display subtitles in the language selected with the [ Subtitle Lan- guage ] in the Setup Menu (factory default setting). Language Code List Japanese (ja) English (en) French (fr) German (de) Italian (it) Spanish (es) Chinese (zh) Dutch (nl) Portuguese (pt) Swedish (sv) Russian (ru) Korean (ko) Greek (el) Afar (aa) Abkhazian (ab) Afrikaans (af) Amharic (am) Arabic (ar) Assamese (as) Ay mara (ay) Azerbaijani (az) Bashkir (ba) Byelorussian (be) Bulgarian (bg) Bihari (bh) Bislama (bi) Bengali (bn) T ibetan (bo) Breton (br) Catalan (ca) Corsican (co) Czech (cs) We lsh (cy) Danish (da) Bhutani (dz) Esperanto (eo) Estonian (et) Basque (eu) Persian (fa) Finnish (fi) Fiji (fj) Faroese (fo) Frisian (fy) Irish (ga) Scots-Gaelic (gd) Galician (gl) Guarani (gn) 1001 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 2608 1412 1620 1922 1821 1115 0512 0101 0102 0106 0113 0118 0119 0125 0126 0201 0205 0207 0208 0209 0214 0215 0218 0301 0315 0319 0325 0401 0426 0515 0520 0521 0601 0609 0610 0615 0625 0701 0704 0712 0714 Language Input-code Gujarati (gu) Hausa (ha) Hindi (hi) Croatian (hr) Hungarian (hu) Armenian (hy) Interlingua (ia ) Interlingue (ie) Inupiak (ik) Indonesian (in) Icelandic (is) Hebrew (iw) Yi ddish (ji) Javanese (jw) Georgian (ka) Kazakh (kk) Greenlandic (kl) Cambodian (km) Kannada (kn) Kashmiri (ks) Kurdish (ku) Kirghiz (ky) Latin (la ) Lingala (ln ) Laothian (lo) Lithuanian (lt) Latvian (lv) Malagasy (mg) Maori (mi) Macedonian (mk) Malayalam (ml) Mongolian (mn) Moldavian (mo) Marathi (mr) Malay (ms) Maltese (mt) Burmese (my) Nauru (na) Nepali (ne) Norwegian (no) Occitan (oc) Oromo (om) Oriya (or) Panjabi (pa) Polish (pl) Pashto, Pushto (ps) Quechua (qu) 0721 0801 0809 0818 0821 0825 0901 0905 0911 0914 0919 0923 1009 1023 1101 1111 1112 1113 1114 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 1220 1222 1307 1309 1311 1312 1314 1315 1318 1319 1320 1325 1401 1405 1415 1503 1513 1518 1601 1612 1619 1721 Language Input-code Rhaeto-Romance (rm) Kirundi (rn) Romanian (ro) Kinyarwanda (rw) Sanskrit (sa) Sindhi (sd) Sangho (sg) Serbo-Croatian (sh) Sinhalese (si) Slovak (sk) Slovenian (sl) Samoan (sm) Shona (sn) Somali (so) Albanian (sq) Serbian (sr) Siswati (ss) Sesotho (st) Sundanese (su) Swahili (sw) T amil (ta) T elugu (te) Ta jik (tg) Thai (th ) Ti grinya (ti) T urkmen (tk) Ta galog (tl) Setswana (tn) T onga (to) T urkish (tr) T songa (ts) T atar (tt) T wi (tw) Ukrainian (uk) Urdu (ur) Uzbek (uz) Vietnamese (vi) Vo lap ük (vo) Wolof (wo) Xhosa (xh) Y oruba (yo) Zulu (zu) 1813 1814 1815 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1923 2001 2005 2007 2008 2009 2011 2012 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 2023 2111 2118 2126 2209 2215 2315 2408 2515 2621 Language Input-cod e
33 INDEX Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Setting Parental Lock Some DVDs containing violent or other mature material are pro- vided with a parental lock function allowing parents to limit the disc â s viewing (see the disc â s jacket or label for information). By setting the player â s lock level lower than that of the disc, you can limit what discs can be viewed on the player . For example, by setting the player â s level to 6, discs with level designation 7 or 8 cannot be viewed unless a previously recorded password is input. ö See P . 24 for menu instructions. Recording a password 1. Use the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ) to navigate to the [General] \ [Parental Lock] \ [Password] A password must be recorded before the [ Level] and [ Coun- try Code ] can be selected. â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Basic Password Level Country Code Setup viewing restrictions SETUP 2. Press the ENTER button. The [ Register Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Register Code Number Enter 4âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 3. Enter a 4-digit numerical code as your new password. Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/ decrement numbers, and use the left/right ( / ) sides to move between digits. 4. Press the ENTER button. The following Setup Menu will be displayed. â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Basic Password Change Level Country Code Setup viewing restrictions SETUP Password Change: Select this item to change your password (code number). Level: Select this item to set the parental lock level. Country Code: Select this item to select the country code of discs. ö It is recommended that you make a memo of your password number and store in a safe place. ö If you forget your password, return the unit to its factory de- fault settings, and set the password again. ö Some discs allow parental lock to be applied at the scene level, in which case restricted scenes will be skipped during playback. For details, consult the Operation Instructions ac- companying your disc. Change the Parental Lock level 1. Select [Level] and press the ENTER button. The [ Confirm Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Level: Confirm Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 2. Input the previously recorded 4-digit password (code number). Input the four digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/ right ( / ) sides to move between digits. 3. Press the ENTER button. The parental lock level setting screen will appear . The factory default setting is [ Off ]. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select Parental Lock: Level Change Set Parental Lock Level SETUP ENTER RETURN 1 Level 234 6 7 8 5 Off 4. Press the cursor button â s left/right sides ( / ) to select the desired level, and press the ENTER button. The selected parental lock level will be set. â T o play back DVDs with parental lock restrictions When an attempt is made to play back a disc restricted with the parental lock function, a screen may appear asking you to input the password (code number). The disc cannot be played back if the code number is not input correctly . Input the code number as follows: 1 Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down ( / ) sides to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/right sides ( / ) to move between digits. 2 Press the ENTER button. T o change your password 1. Select the [Password Change] and press the ENTER button. The [ Confirm Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 2. Input the previously set code number . Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down ( / ) sides to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/right sides ( / ) to move between digits.
34 Preparations (Setup) 3. Press the ENTER button. The [ Change Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Change Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 4. Enter a new 4-digit password (code number). Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/ right sides ( / ) to move between digits. 5. Press the ENTER button. The password (code number) will be changed. T o change the country code Consult the accompanying Country Code List when making this setting. 1. Select [Country Code] and press the ENTER button. The [ Confirm Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Country Code: Confirm Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 2. Input the previously recorded 4-digit password (code number). Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/ right sides ( / ) to move between digits. 3. Press the ENTER button. The Setup Country Code menu will appear . List of Codes Code (0~2) us Setup Country Code Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Country Code 21 1 9 SETUP RETURN ENTER 4. Select either [List of Codes] or [Code] The numbers listed in parentheses ( ) beside [ Code] indicate the range of numbers possible. â When using [Code] to select the country code: (Example) Selecting the code for U.S.A. Input the 4-digit code number (2, 1, 1, 9) by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decre- ment numbers, and the left/right sides ( / ) to move be- tween digits. â When using [List of Codes] to select the country code: (Example) Selecting the code for U.S.A. Use the cursor button â s up/down side ( / ) to highlight [us]. 5. Press the ENTER button. ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA BELGIUM BRAZIL CANADA CHILE CHINA DENMARK FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY HONG KONG INDIA INDONESIA IT AL Y JAP AN KOREA, REPUBLIC OF MALA YSIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND NORW A Y P AKISTAN PHILIPPINES PORTUGAL RUSSIAN FEDERA TION SINGAPORE SP AIN SWEDEN SWITZERLAND T AIWAN THAILAND UNITED KINGDOM UNITED ST A TES OF AMERICA 0118 0121 0120 0205 0218 0301 0312 0314 0411 0609 0618 0405 0811 0914 0904 0920 1016 1118 1325 1324 1412 1426 1415 1611 1608 1620 1821 1907 0519 1905 0308 2023 2008 0702 2119 Country/area Input-code Country/area- code ar au at be br ca cl cn dk fi fr de hk in id it jp kr my mx nl nz no pk ph pt ru sg es se ch tw th gb us Country/Area Code List
35 Basic Operations (Loading and Removing Discs) Basic Operations (Loading and Removing Discs) Loading and Removing Discs Hold evenly when inserting Insert with label surface upwards 1. Set the rear panel POWER switch to ON. Do not attempt to forcibly insert a disc when the POWER switch is set to OFF , since the disc or player may be damaged. 2. Insert the disc into the loading slot. ö Hold the disc with label surface upwards and insert evenly into the front-panel disc loading slot. ö When using 8 cm compact discs, place the disc into an adapter first. ö Only one disc can be loaded at a time. Do not attempt to load two or more discs simultaneously , or to load a second disc when an- other disc is already loaded. ö When loading a disc, do not apply bending force on the disc, or attempt to force the disc into the mechanism. Also, when the load- ing mechanism begins to pull the disc into the player or to eject a disc, do not attempt to forcibly override the mechanismâ s move- ment, since the disc or player may be damaged. 3. When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to UNLOCK, press the EJECT ( 0) button to eject a loaded disc. If the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to LOCK, during play- back press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button to first stop the disc, then press the EJECT ( 0) button. If a cue point has been set, during playback press the CUE button to initi- ate back cue, then press the EJECT ( 0) button to eject the disc. ö When the button is pressed, disc rotation will stop and the disc will be ejected partway from the loading slot. Note: Do not attempt to press the disc back into the slot while the â EJECT â indicator is lighted. If the disc is pressed back in while the â EJECT â indicator is lighted, the loading mechanism may stop. In this case, press the EJECT ( 0 ) button again, and do not attempt to reload the disc until the â EJECTâ indicator has turned OFF . Precautions when playing 8 cm CD singles 1 When playing 8 cm CD singles, be sure to use an adapter de- signed for 8 cm CDs. Before loading the disc into the player , confirm that the disc is fastened correctly by the adapterâ s tabs. If an 8 cm disc is loaded by mistake without an adapter , immedi- ately press the EJECT ( 0 ) button and remove the disc. If the disc is not ejected the first time the EJECT ( 0) button is pressed, press the button again. 2 Use only 8 cm disc adapters that feature the ' logo mark (rec- ommended compatible adapters). When mounting the disc to an adapter , confirm that the disc is able to rotate freely , and is not bent or warped. Forced eject function In event of a player malfunction or if the EJECT ( 0 ) button does not respond to allow removal of a disc, the disc can be removed by inserting the accessory pin into the forced eject hole on the front of the player . When using the forced eject function, be sure to following the accompanying precautions. 1 T urn off the playerâ s power and wait for at least one minute. Attempting the forced eject function im- mediately after turning off the power may cause the following dangers: ö The disc may be ejected while still rotating, resulting in personal injury . ö The disc may be damaged due to the disc clampâ s rotating in an unstable condition. 2 Use only the provided accessory pin for this procedure (do not use other pointed objects). The forced eject pin is located on the bottom surface of the player . When the accessory pin is inserted fully into the forced eject hole, the disc will be ejected from the loading slot by about 5 mm to 10 mm. It can then be grasped with the fingers and removed. Forced eject hole Note: This player does not support playback of 8 cm DVDs. Do not attempt to use adapters meant for 8 cm CDs, since the adapter may come loose during rotation, causing damage to the disc or player .
36 Basic Operations Basic Operations Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to NORMAL. Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to DJ. Beginning playback The playback operation differs depending on the type of disc, the setting of the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch, and the setting of auto cue and other functions. When a CD is loaded When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâÂÂ, play- back will begin automatically from the first track, and when the final track ends, playback will stop. Special DJ functions are not supported in this mode. When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the â DJâÂÂ, if the auto cue function is OFF , playback will begin automatically from the first track, and when the final track ends, playback will stop and the unit will enter standby . When the auto cue function is set to ON, the player will auto- matically cue to the selected cue point and the cue indicator will light; the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. If the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is then pressed, the player will skip over the non-recorded portion of the indicated track and immedi- ately begin playback. When playback comes to the end of the current track, the next track will be cued. The cue indicator will light, and the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. When the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed, playback will begin from the next track. When playing a CD disc recorded with MP3 files, playback will begin automatically from the first track in the first folder on the disc; when the final track of the folder ends, playback will stop and the unit will enter standby . When a DVD is loaded When a commercial DVD title is loaded, the initial default cautionary warnings will be displayed first (these warning messages cannot be skipped). When the DVD is recorded with a menu and automatic play- back start has not been set, the menu will appear . The menu can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button or the T .MENU button. The menu allows the setting of audio and subtitle languages, and the selec- tion of special features on the disc. EXAMPLE: Main Menu 1. Highlight clips 2. Chapter list 3. Previews 4. Subtitle settings 5. Audio settings 6. Play Depending on the disc, the style, contents, and operation method used in the menu may be different. Basic operations are performed by using the cursor button â s four sides ( / / / ) to select options, and by pressing the ENTER button to confirm the selection. For de- tailed instructions on using a disc â s menu, consult the operating guide provided with the disc. â DJ operations cannot be per formed on the menu display . When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâ and the disc has been set for automatic playback start (or the menu â s âÂÂPlay â item has been selected), playback will begin. Special DJ functions are not supported in this mode. When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â DJâ and auto cue function (see next item) is OFF , if the disc is set for automatic playback start (or or the menu â s âÂÂPlay â item has been selected), playback will begin. When the auto cue function is set to ON, the player will automati- cally cue to the selected cue point and the cue indicator will light; the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. If the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is then pressed, the player will skip over the non-recorded portion of the indicated chapter and immedi- ately begin playback. When playback comes to the end of the current track, the next track will be cued. The cue indicator will light, and the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. When the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed, the player will begin playback of the next chapter . ö Some of the above operations may not be supported, depending on the disc or the portion being played. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO MENU T.MENU IN ADJUST CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT DVJ-1000 FWD REV PLAY/P AUSE ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT UNLOCK/LOCK STOP TIME MODE/AUTO CUE PLA Y/ P AUSE î CUE AUDIO TOUCH/ BRAKE RELEASE /ST ART SUBTITLE JOG MODE EJECT DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER î /î ENTER T .MEMU MENU PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â NORMAL/DJ
37 Basic Operations Auto cue function â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. This function is used to skip non-recorded (silent) portions at the begin- ning of tracks and automatically set the cue point ( â P . 40) immediately before actual sound begins when loading a disc, performing track search (chapter search), and when the playback track (chapter) changes. If the track signal cannot be found within ten seconds, the track â s beginning will be set as the cue point. â Setting auto cue ON/OFF Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 1 second or more to alternate the auto cue function ON/OFF . The display â s auto cue indicator ( A.CUE) lights when the auto cue function is active. ö The auto cue function ON/OFF status is memorized even when the player â s power is turned off. ö The auto cue sensitivity level can be changed if desired. â Changing the auto cue sensitivity level 1. Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 5 seconds or more. ö The display will show the â A.CUE âÂÂ60dBâ indicator (factory de- fault setting). 2. Press the cursor buttonâ s left/right sides ( / ) to change the sensitivity level. ö Supported sensitivity levels include: â 36 dB, â 42 dB, â 48 dB, â 54 dB, â 60 dB, â 66 dB, â 72 dB, â 78 dB. ö Either press the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button or wait 15 sec- onds and the setting mode will be canceled and the newly se- lected level will be set. ö The newly set sensitivity level is memorized even when the play- er â s power is turned off. T o stop playback â When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to UNLOCK: Press the STOP button. â When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to LOCK: During playback, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button, or if a cue point has been set, during playback press the CUE button to initiate back cue, then press the STOP button. ö When the STOP button is pressed, the current stop location will be recorded (resume function). ö T o resume play from the previous stop position, press the PLA Y/ P AUSE ( 6 ) button. ö T o cancel the resume function, press the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ or PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â button. T o eject the disc 1. Press the EJECT ( 0) button when the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to UNLOCK. When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to LOCK, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button during playback, or when a cue point has been set, press the CUE button (back cue) before pressing the EJECT ( 0) button to eject the disc. ö Playback will stop and the disc will be ejected. Resume function ö If the EJECT (0 ) button is accidentally pressed when the UNLOCK/ LOCK switch is in the UNLOCK position, immediately press the PLA Y/ P AUSE ( 6 ) button to restore the unit to the mode it was in immedi- ately prior to pressing the EJECT ( 0 ) button. However , video and audio output will be interrupted during this interval. ö Following disc eject, if the same disc is reinserted, the unit will return to the same status it was in before the disc was ejected (with excep- tion of loop). ö After ejecting a disc, if the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button or PREVIOUS 4/NEXT â button is pressed the resume function will be canceled. ö The resume function may not operate when playing DVDs in NOR- MAL mode. T o temporarily interrupt playback (pause mode) During playback, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button. ö The play/pause indicator and cue indicator will flash and play will be interrupted. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of playback pause; in this case pressing the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button will cause the prohibited mark to light, and the corresponding prohibited mark will appear on the monitor . ö If the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed when the player is in the pause (standby) mode, the play/pause indicator will light and play- back will begin. ö If the pause mode is allowed to continue for 100 minutes or more, the disc playback will automatically stop. In this case, press the PLA Y/ P AUSE ( 6) button to resume playback. [In DJ mode, with jog mode set to VINYL mode OFF] ö Placing the player in pause mode enables audible pause (the video image appears as a still image, but audio sound can be heard inter - mittently). If sound is not desired in this case, lower the audio mixer â s output level. [In DJ mode, with jog mode set to VINYL mode ON] ö Placing the player in pause mode enables silent pause (still image with no sound). ö The TOUCH/BRAKE response dial can be used to modify the disc â s deceleration speed (time until playback stops). ö The RELEASE/ST ART response dial can be used to modify the disc â s playback acceleration time (time until disc reaches full playback speed). [In NORMAL mode] ö Placing the player in pause mode enables silent pause (still image with no sound). T o change language/subtitle settings during playback (DVD only) â T o change language during playback: The language setting can be changed during playback when the DVD has been recorded with multiple language options. Press the AUDIO button. The currently selected audio (language) option will be displayed on the screen. Each time the button is pressed the language will alternate be- tween the available language options. ö If the language is changed when the player is in DJ mode, both video and audio playback will be temporarily interrupted (due to writing to buffer memory). ö Some discs do not allow the audio language option to be changed with the AUDIO button (pressing the button will cause the prohibited mark to light, and the corresponding prohibited mark will ap- pear on the screen). In this case, go to the disc â s main menu to switch the language option. ö When a disc is removed from the player , the language setting will revert to that selected on the Setup Menu. ö With some discs, changing the language will cause the image to pause momentarily . â Changing the subtitle option during playback â This option is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to DJ (subtitles are not displayed in DJ mode). The subtitle language can be changed when the DVD has been recorded with multiple subtitle language options. Press the SUBTITLE button. The currently selected subtitle option will be displayed on the screen. Each time the button is pressed, the subtitle language will alternate be- tween the available options; if OFF is selected, subtitles will not appear . ö Some discs do not allow the subtitle option to be changed with the SUBTITLE button (pressing the button will cause the prohibited mark to light, and the corresponding prohibited mark will appear on the screen). In this case, go to the disc â s main menu to switch the subtitle language. ö When a disc is removed from the player , the subtitle setting will re- vert to that selected on the Setup Menu.
38 Basic Operations Fast forward/fast reverse Press the REV 1 /FWD á button during playback or when in the pause mode. [During CD playback] Hold the FWD á button depressed to perform fast forward. Hold the REV 1 button depressed to perform fast reverse. [During DVD playback in DJ mode] Hold the FWD á button depressed to perform fast forward. Hold the REV 1 button depressed to perform fast reverse. Fast forward and reverse are performed only within a single disc title. [During DVD playback in NORMAL mode] Press the FWD á button to perform fast forward. Press the REV 1 button to perform fast reverse. Each time the button is pressed and released, the speed of fast for - ward/reverse changes (in three stages). Press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to return the player from search mode to normal playback mode. No sound is output during manual search. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of manual search. In this case, the pro- hibited mark will light, and the same prohibited mark will ap- pear on the monitor screen. ö When playing a DVD in DJ mode, the above functions may not be supported depending on the disc or on the part being played. ö In the case of MP3, fast forward and reverse can be performed only within the same folder . ö In the case of MP3, the speed of fast forward/fast reverse may be reduced, depending on the file. â Super -fast search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the REV 1 / FWD á buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding either button depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction you wish the search operation to occur , and the player will enter the super-fast search mode. ö The speed of the search operation varies in response to the speed at which the jog dial is turned. In the case of DVDs, search speed is limited to a single high-speed setting. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the manual search button is ignored. ö When the jog dial is released, the disc will enter the playback mode. ö If the manual search button is released, the super-fast search mode will be canceled. ö In the case of MP3, fast forward and reverse can be performed only within the same folder . ö In the case of MP3, the speed of fast forward/fast reverse may be reduced, depending on the file. Changing the viewing angle (DVD only) Alternate viewing angles can be selected during playback of DVDs re- corded with multiple angles. ö DVDs recorded with multiple angles display the mark on their jacket. During playback, when the mark is displayed, press the ANGLE button. Each time the button is pressed the angle view alternates between those available. û ö If the angle is changed when the player is in DJ mode, both video and audio playback will be temporarily interrupted (due to writing to buffer memory). ö Some discs may not allow changing of the viewing angle, even though they display the mark. ö While in NORMAL mode or the main unit â s display shows â DISABLE DJ MODE â message, the pause mode will be released if the angle is changed during playback pause. ö Some DVDs allow changing of the angle by means of the disc â s main menu as well. T o turn off the angle indicator While in NORMAL mode, go to the Setup Menu and set [ Angle Indica- tor ] to [Off ] ( â P .30). Regardless of the setting of the Setup Menu â s [ Angle Indicator], when in DJ mode, the mark will not appear in individual scenes during playback. When display mode is ON, the mark will be displayed within the guide area of the preview monitor , during the playback of points that allow the selection of alternate angles. \ | ë Jog dial REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 FWD REV PREVIOUS NEXT ANGLE PLA Y/P AUSE 6 DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER î /î REV î FWD î PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â NORMAL/DJ
39 Basic Operations T rack search (skip) Use the PREVIOUS 4 /NEXT â buttons. ö Each time the button is pressed, playback skips to the next chap- ter (DVD) or track (CD) in the direction indicated by the button pressed. T o return to the start of the currently playing track, press the PREVIOUS 4 button once. T o return to the beginning of the track preceding the currently playing track, press the PREVI- OUS 4 button twice. ö Hold the button depressed to perform continuous track search. If the button is held depressed for 2 seconds, the search speed will increase. ö If auto cue is enabled and the player is in cue standby mode at the beginning of a track, pressing the PREVIOUS 4 button will cause the player to search for the track previous to the current one, and enter cue standby at the beginning of that track. ö In the case of MP3, the search will skip to the first track found in the designated direction; also, the skip function is supported only within the same folder . [During CD playback] ö During playback of the disc â s first track (01), pressing the PREVI- OUS 4 button twice in succession will cause the player to search for the beginning of the last track. In the case of MP3, when reverse direction skip is performed down to the lowest numbered track, the next skip will take it to the last track in the same folder . ö During playback of the last track, pressing the NEXT â button once will cause the player to search for the disc â s first track (01). In the case of MP3, if you attempt to move beyond the last track, the skip will move to the lowest numbered track within the same folder . [During DVD playback in DJ mode] ö During playback of the disc â s first chapter (001), pressing the PRE- VIOUS 4 button twice in succession will cause the player to search for the beginning of the last chapter . ö During playback of the last chapter , pressing the NEXT â but- ton will cause the player to search for the disc â s first chapter (001). [During DVD playback in NORMAL mode] ö During playback of the last chapter , pressing the NEXT â but- ton will cause the player to search for the disc â s next title. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of chapter search. In this case, the pro- hibited mark will light, and the same prohibited mark will ap- pear on the monitor screen. ö When playing a DVD in DJ mode, the above functions may not be supported depending on the disc or on the part being played. â Super -fast track search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the PREVI- OUS 4/NEXT â buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding either button depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction you wish the search operation to occur , and the player will search for tracks in response to the amount of jog dial rotation. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â button is ignored. ö This mode is canceled when the PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â but- ton is released. T itle search (DVD only) Use the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons. ö Each time the button is pressed, the player will search for the next (or previous) title (or PGC on multi-PGC discs) in the direction indicated. ö If the button is held depressed, the player will enter continuous search mode. If the button is held depressed for 2 seconds, the search speed will accelerate. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of title search. In this case, the prohib- ited mark will light, and the same prohibited mark will appear on the monitor screen. ö When playing a DVD in DJ mode, the above functions may not be supported depending on the disc or on the part being played. â Super -fast title search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the DVD TI- TLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding either of the buttons depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction you wish the search operation to occur , and the player will search for titles in response to the amount of jog dial rotation. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ but- ton is ignored. ö This mode is canceled when the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button is released. Folder search (MP3 only) Use this function when performing track search on CD or DVD with lay- ered folder structure. Use the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons. ö Each time the button is pressed, search advances in the next folder of the direction designated by the button pressed. In the root di- rectory , the folder number â 00â and folder name â ROOTâ are displayed. ö If the button is held depressed, continuous folder search will be performed. If the button is held depressed for two seconds or more, the speed of search will increase. ö If an attempt is made to move backwards from the lowest num- bered folder , the search will move to the last folder on the disc. ö If an attempt is made to move forwards from the highest num- bered (last) folder , the search will move to the first (lowest num- bered) folder on the disc. ö Folders not containing any playable tracks will be ignored, and the search will move to the next folder . â Super -fast folder search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the DVD TI- TLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding one of the buttons depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction corresponding to the desired direction of search; search of folder numbers will be quickly performed in the indicated direc- tion. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button is ignored. ö This mode is canceled when the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button is released.
40 Basic Operations REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO ENTER OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV IN ADJUST REALTIME CUE IN CUE REV 1, FWD á PLA Y/P AUSE 6 TEMPO MASTER TEMPO TEMPO TEMPO RESET JOG ADJUST DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER î /î PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â TEXT MODE IN/ REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST CUE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial Setting cue points â This function is not suppor ted when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. When a cue point has been previously set, pressing the CUE button during playback will cause the player to move instantly to the cue point and enter the cue standby mode. ö Storing to memory may not be possible while the jog dial â s audio/ video memory status display is flashing. â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode OFF 1. During playback, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button near the point you wish to set as a cue point. The player will enter the pause mode. 2. Search for the precise cue point. ö Using frame numbers: The cue point position can be set in units of single frames (75 frames per second). Using the jog dial or the REV 1 /FWD á buttons, advance or reverse the frames to the desired point. One revolution of the jog dial is equivalent to 135 frames; each time the search button is pressed, the disc moves one frame in the direction corresponding to the button. ö Search for cue point using audible pause: Rotate the jog dial slowly and reverse the disc to the instant just prior to the point from which you wish to begin playback (the cue point will be set at the point immediately after the sound heard during audible pause). 3. When you have found the desired cue point using the frame number or audible pause, press the CUE button. ö When the cue indicator lights, the new cue point has been re- corded in memory . ö During DVD playback, a thumbnail of the cue point appears on the preview monitor screen. ö During CD or MP3 playback, the cue point's track number and time are displayed on the preview screen. ö When a new cue point is recorded in memory , the previously memorized cue point will be erased. [Modifying a cue point] 1. During playback, press the CUE button. ö Playback will return to the set cue point and enter cue standby . 2. Use the REV 1 /FWDá buttons to enter audible pause mode. 3. Find the new cue point by performing steps 2 and 3 of the above section â â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode OFF â . â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode ON 1. As playback nears the desired cue point, either press the top surface of the jog dial or press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to set the unit in pause mode. 2. While pressing the surface of the jog dial, listen to the playback sound as you rotate the dial, and return play- back to the point just before the spot you wish to use as the cue point. 3. When the sound is at the desired cue point, continue hold- ing the surface of the jog dial depressed, and press the CUE button. ö When the cue indicator lights, the new cue point has been re- corded in memory . ö When a new cue point is recorded in memory , the previously memorized cue point will be erased. [Modifying a cue point] 1. During playback, press the CUE button. ö Playback will return to the set cue point and enter cue standby . 2. Perform steps 2 and 3 of the previous section â â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode ON â . ö In the same way as for VINYL mode OFF , the REV 1 /FWD á buttons can also be used to modify a cue point. â Real time cue During forward playback, press the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button at the place you wish to set as cue point. ö This point will be recorded as the new cue point. â Confirm cue point (cue point sampler) After setting a cue point, depress the CUE button while the unit is in the cue standby mode. ö The audio and video from the cue point will be played back while the CUE button is held depressed, allowing you to confirm the point. â T o return to a cue point (back cue) During playback, press the CUE button. ö Playback will return to the previously set cue point, sound will be muted, and the monitor screen will display black background as the unit enters the cue standby mode. ö Press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to resume playback instantly from the cue point. ö When playing a DVD that prohibits title or other searches, playback will continue, and the prohibited mark will appear in the display; the similar mark will appear on the monitor screen. ö In the case of MP3, back cue is supported only within one and the same folder . Changing playback speed â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. Slide the TEMPO control slider forward or back. When the slider is moved forward ( ), playback speed will increase, and when moved back ( â ), playback speed will decrease. ö The rate of tempo change is displayed. ö It is also possible to change playback speed without affecting the pitch ( â P .41, â Setting master tempoâ ). â Selecting a tempo control range Press the TEMPO button. Each time the button is pressed, the TEMPO control slider â s variable control range alternates between the values ñ6 %, ñ10 %, ñ16 %, and WIDE. The range can be adjusted in increments of 0.02 % (for ñ6 %), 0.05 % (for ñ10 %), 0.05 % (for ñ16 %), and 0.5 % (for WIDE). ö The variable control range setting value is shown by the tempo control range indicator (ñ6, ñ10, ñ16, WIDE), as well as in the onscr een display . ö The variability in the WIDE range is: ñ100 % (CD) 70 % to âÂÂ100 % (DVD, MP3) â T empo Reset Press the TEMPO RESET button. The TEMPO RESET indicator lights and the tempo change rate is reset to â 0â (normal tempo), regardless of the position of the TEMPO control slider . ö If the TEMPO RESET button is pressed once again, tempo reset is canceled, and the tempo returns to the value set with the TEMPO control slider .
41 Basic Operations Setting master tempo â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. During playback, press the MASTER TEMPO button. The master tempo indicator lights and the â MTâ indicator appears on the display . In this way , the music pitch will not vary even if the TEMPO control slider is used to change the tempo (speed). ö Note that sound quality will deteriorate, however , due to digital processing of the audio signals. ö When power is first turned on, this function defaults to OFF . Jog dial functions â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. 1. Rotate during playback (pitch bend). When the jog dial is set to VINYL mode ON, take care to operate the jog dial by rotating its outer periphery (the inclined surface); touching the top panel will cause operation of a separate function. ö Playback is accelerated ( FWD ) or decelerated ( REV â ) in an amount corresponding to the degree of jog dial rotation. In the reverse play mode, the operating directions are reversed (accelerated when rotated in the REV â direction, and decelerated when rotated in the FWD direction). ö When the jog dial rotation is stopped, playback returns to its previ- ous speed. 2. Rotate during playback (scratch play). See the section â Scratch Play â in Advanced Operations (P . 43). 3. Rotate during pause (frame search). [When jog mode is in VINYL mode OFF] The player will enter the audible pause mode (the paused image is displayed). ö When the jog dial is rotated, the audible pause position changes in individual frame units, in the direction corresponding to the direc- tion of jog dial rotation. ö One full revolution of the jog dial is equivalent to 1.8 seconds (135 frames) of disc advance (or reversal). [When jog mode is in VINYL mode ON] The player will enter the silent pause mode (the paused image is displayed). ö When the jog dial is rotated, the disc is played back in the direction and at a speed proportional to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation, and the pause position changes in individual frame units. ö When the hand is removed from the surface of the jog dial and rotation stops, the unit enters the silent pause mode again with paused image displayed. ö One full revolution of the jog dial is equivalent to 1.8 seconds (135 frames) of disc advance (or reversal). 4. Rotate during playback or in pause mode (spin). See the section â Spin playâ in Advanced Operations (P . 43). 5. Rotate during playback, while depressing the REV 1 / FWD á buttons (super -fast search). While holding one of the REV 1 /FWD á buttons depressed, ro- tate the jog dial in the direction corresponding to the direction of de- sired search; the search will be performed at faster - than-normal speed. 6. Rotate while depressing PREVIOUS 4 /NEXTâ button (super -fast track search). While holding one of the PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â buttons de- pressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction corresponding to the di- rection of desired search (track search or chapter search); the search will be performed at a faster -than-normal speed, proportionate to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. 7. Rotate while depressing the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | / \ button. (Super -fast title search) (DVD) (Super -fast folder search) (MP3) While holding one of the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER |/ \ buttons depressed, turn the jog dial in the direction you wish to perform the search. Super -fast title (or folder) search will be performed in the direc- tion the jog dial is turned, and in proportion to the speed of the jog dial â s rotation. Note: The top surface of the jog dial is equipped with a pressure-sensitive switch. Do not rest objects on the dial, or subject it to severe im- pact or pressure. Do not rest drinks or other open liquids on the player; if the liquid spills, it may enter the player â s parts, damaging the player . Jog sensitivity adjustment By rotating the JOG ADJUST dial, the sensation of resistance felt when rotating the jog dial can be adjusted. Rotate JOG ADJUST dial. ö When rotated clockwise, resistance increases. ö When rotated counterclockwise, resistance decreases. ö Adjust the setting within the scale â s gray zone to set the jog dial sen- sation equivalent to that of the CDJ-1000MK2. JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEA VY Gray zone About the W A VE display â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position (replaced by TEXT dis- play). The W A VE display shows the changes in a track â s bass beat (bass drum, etc.), thus allowing the DJ to understand where breaks and end points come in the track. When the TEXT MODE button is used to switch to W A VE display , the single chapter or track will be displayed over the full range (100 points) of the display . ö After a track change, some time is required before the entire track â s W A VE display can be shown. By prerecording desired tracks â WA VE patterns on a memory card, the next time the track is played its W A VE pattern can be displayed instantly . ö If a track â s low-frequency beat changes are too low in volume, the break points in the track may not be displayed properly . ö If a search or pause operation is performed during the time the wave- form is being read, the waveform will not be displayed properly . ö Read-ahead processing of the W A VE display is not possible during DVD or MP3 playback. ö When playing MP3, W A VE display may not be possible, depending on the track.
42 Basic Operations About the TEXT display When the TEXT MODE button is used to select TEXT display , the dis- play shows CD-TEXT , including the names of tracks, albums, and artists. During MP3 playback, the display shows ID3 tag track name (if no ID3 tag is recorded, the display shows the file name) /ID3 tag album name/ ID3 tag artist name. ö Each title display can include up to 48 characters; title displays of 15 or more characters will scroll. ö T ext may include alphanumerics and some symbols. ö If no text is available, the â NO TEXTâ message will be displayed. ö The text will not be displayed during DVD playback. When a track name is selected in TEXT display , the â â icon will be displayed followed by the track name (with MP3, the ID3 tag â s title name or file name will be displayed). Also, during MP3 play , the bit rate will be displayed following the track name. DVJ-1000 128 kbps When an album name is selected in TEXT display , the â â icon will be displayed followed by the album name. Pioneer When an artist name is selected in TEXT display , the â â icon will be displayed followed by the artist â s name. Pioneer PRO DJ When folder search is performed with MP3, the folder name is displayed during the search. Pioneer DJ Mixing different tracks (splicing) â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. (Example) T o splice the next track (B) to the currently playing track (A). ö Connect the first player A to DJ mixer CH-1, and second player B to CH-2. ö Raise trim, channel fader , and master volume to appropriate levels, and set player A for playback. 1. Set the DJ mixer â s CROSS F ADER lever to the left (CH-1) side. ö T rack A plays. 2. Load the desired disc on player B. 3. Use the PREVIOUS 4 /NEXTâ buttons on the player B to select the desired track B. 4. Monitor CH-2 on the DJ mixer . 5. Rotate the DJ mixer â s MONITOR LEVEL dial and listen to track B on headphones. ö The main speakers produce the sound of track A only . 6. Select the cue point for track B while listening on the head- phones. 1 With the player B in playback mode, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button near the desired track B cue point. ö If the jog mode is set to VINYL mode OFF , the audible pause mode will be enabled; if the jog mode is VINYL mode ON, the silent pause mode will be enabled. 2 Rotate the player B jog dial to find the exact cue point (first beat) of track B. 3 Once track B â s cue point has been set, press the CUE button on player B. ö Sound will be muted and the cue point will be set. 7. In beat with the sound of track A from the speakers, press the player B â s PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button. ö The speakers will produce the sound of track A. ö The headphones will produce the sound of track B. 8. Move the second player B â s TEMPO control slider so that the tempo (BPM) of track A and B are aligned. Move the player B â s TEMPO contr ol slider so that the displayed BPM of track B matches the BPM value for track A. ö When the BPM numbers match, tempo adjustment is completed. 9. Press the player B â s CUE button. ö The player B will return to the previously set track B cue point. 10. While listening to the closing sounds of player A â s track A from the speakers, press the player B â s PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button. ö The player B begins playing track B. 11. While confirming the sound on the headphone, steadily move the DJ mixer â s cross fader lever toward the right side. ö The sounds of track B will gradually mix with and replace the sounds of track A heard from the speaker . ö When the DJ mixer â s cross fader lever has moved completely to the right side, the splicing has been completed. â Long mix play As long as the BPM rates match, track A and track B will mix well, even if the cross fader lever is in the middle position. â Fader start play Using the cross fader start function on a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold sepa- rately), the mixing operation can be simplified by eliminating step 10 (above). Also, when the cross fader lever is returned, the players return to the status of step 9 (above), so sound can be produced repeatedly . REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO ENTER OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV IN ADJUST REALTIME CUE IN CUE PLA Y/P AUSE 6 TEMPO PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â TEXT MODE CUE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial
43 Advanced Operations Advanced Operations REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV PLA Y/P AUSE 6 JOG MODE RELEASE / ST ART TOUCH / BRAKE C A B HOT CUE HOT CUE REC MODE IN/ REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST OUT/ OUT ADJUST HYPERJOG MODE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial Scratch play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. When the jog mode is set to VINYL mode ON, pressing the jog dialâ s top panel while rotating the dial will cause audio and video to be output in proportion to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. 1. Press the JOG MODE select button so that the VINYL mode indicator lights. 2. During playback, press the top of the jog dial. ö Playback will slow and come to a stop (the time required to com- plete stop can be set independently). ö If the jog dial is rotated as playback slows but before it has com- pletely stopped, sound will be interrupted suddenly , and will then start again, but in the direction corresponding to the direction the jog dial is rotated in step 3. 3. Rotate the jog dial in the desired direction of playback. ö Playback will occur in proportion to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. 4. Release hand from surface of jog dial. ö Playback will return to its original status (the time required until full acceleration can be set independently). â T o set the deceleration time (time until playback fully stops when jog dial surface is pressed) Rotate the TOUCH/BRAKE response dial. ö The time till playback stops changes. ö This is the same setting as the deceleration speed adjustment used when the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed in VINYL mode to temporarily pause playback. â T o set the acceleration time (time until playback fully re- gains original speed when hand is released from jog dial surface) Rotate the RELEASE/ST ART response dial. ö The time till playback returns to normal speed changes. ö This is the same setting as the acceleration speed adjustment used when the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed in VINYL mode to resume playback. [Hyper jog mode] When jog mode is set to VINYL mode ON, press the HYPERJOG MODE button so that the indicator lights. When the jog dial is then rotated, the amount of sound or image change will quadruple (x4) in response to the rotation angle of the dial. Spin play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. With VINYL mode ON, press the surface of the jog dial, or press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to set the unit to pause, then rotate the jog dial quickly; even if you remove your hand from the jog dial, playback will occur in proportion to the direction and speed of the jog dial rotation. Braking â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö During playback in VINYL mode, if the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed to pause playback, the sound decelerates at the braking speed set with the TOUCH/BRAKE dial. ö When the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed once again to resume playback, the sound accelerates at the speed set with the RELEASE/ ST ART dial. Hot cue â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. This function allows playback to be started quickly from one of three points (A, B, C), by previous setting of cue point and loop information. ö Storing to memory may not be possible while the jog dialâ s audio/ video memory status display is flashing. â Setting hot cue point 1. Press the HOT CUE REC MODE button so that the HOT CUE A, B, and C button indicators light red. 2. During playback, pause mode or cue standby mode, find the point you wish to use as the hot cue, and at that point press the button (A, B, or C) in which you wish to store the cue information. ö The button memory will recorded with the time position data and playback method. ö The pressed button will flash red for about 2 seconds, then light steadily . ö During DVD playback, a thumbnail of the hot cue point will be displayed on the preview monitor screen. ö If the HOT CUE button is pressed during the loop setting mode (while OUT/OUT ADJUST and IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST buttons are flashing), the currently playing loop information will be stored in memory . ö If a memory card is loaded, the data recorded to the HOT CUE button will be stored on the memory card; in this way , the previ- ously set information can be called up quickly when playing the same disc at a later date ( â P .47). Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to NORMAL.
44 Advanced Operations â Starting a hot cue 1. Press the HOT CUE REC MODE button so that the HOT CUE A, B, and C button indicators light green or orange. ö Buttons containing stored hot cue points will light green. ö Buttons containing stored loop information will light orange. ö Buttons without any stored information will not light. 2. During playback, pause, or cue standby mode, press one of the buttons with recorded information (A, B, or C). ö During playback, pause mode or cue standby mode, if a green or orange lighted button is pressed, playback will begin instantly based on the information recorded in the button. In this case, cue point information stored in the normal CUE button, or loop information stored in the RELOOP/EXIT button will not be overwritten, but remain valid. ö Pressing a HOT CUE button with stored loop information causes loop playback to begin instantly based on the stored information. In this case, the RELOOP/EXIT button can be used to cancel the loop playback just as with normal loop play; in addition, the IN/ REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button can be used to modify the loop-in point, and the OUT/OUT ADJUST button can be used to modify the loop-out point. If loop information is modified, the loop information stored in the button will simultaneously be modified. ö If a memory card is loaded, inserting a disc will allow previously recorded hot cue and loop information for that disc to be restored ( â P .48). * When playing a DVD that prohibits title or other searches, it may be impossible to begin playback from the hot cue point. In this case, the prohibited mark will appear in the display and the similar mark will appear on the monitor screen. * In the case of MP3, hot cue is supported only within one and the same folder . Loop playback â This function is not suppor ted when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. â T o create a loop 1. Press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 3 / 8) button to begin playback. 2. During playback, press the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button. ö This step is unnecessary if you wish to use a previously recorded cue point as the loop-in point. ö During the time required for writing the loop-in point, the IN/ REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button will flash for about 2 sec- onds. REV FWD HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV DIRECTION CUE PLA Y/P AUSE 6 C A B HOT CUE HOT CUE REC MODE IN/ REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST OUT/ OUT ADJUST REV 1, FWD á 4-BEA T/ ONE-TRACK RELOOP/ EXIT BACK& FORTH DIRECTION FWD/REV CUE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial 3. During playback, press the OUT/OUT ADJUST button at the point you wish to use as the loop-out point. ö Repeat play (loop play) will begin without break between the se- lected loop-in and loop-out points. ö The frame search function can be used to set more accurate out points. ö If an alternate viewing angle or audio channel is selected before setting a loop-out point, it may not possible to designate a loop- out point. ö Loop-out points cannot be set during reverse play . ö In the case of MP3, looping is possible only within the same track where the cue point was set. â T o cancel loop play During loop playback, press the RELOOP/EXIT button. ö The loop will be canceled and playback will continue normally past the loop-out point. â T o adjust a loop-in point 1. During loop playback, press the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button. ö The display will show the loop-in point time, and the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button will flash rapidly , while the OUT/OUT ADJUST button light will go out. 2. Press the REV 1 /FWDá button, or rotate the jog dial. ö The loop-in point will be moved in one-frame increments. The permissible range of loop-in point adjustment is ñ30 frames during CD play , or ñ6 frames for DVD play , and must be located before the loop-out point. ö In the case of MP3 play , loop adjustment can be performed only within the same track where the cue point is set. ö The loop-in point cannot be adjusted during reverse play or scratch play . ö If the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button is pressed, or 30 seconds is allowed to elapse, the loop adjust mode will be canceled and operation will return to normal loop play . â T o adjsut a loop-out point 1. During loop playback, press the OUT/OUT ADJUST but- ton. ö The display will show the loop-out point time, and the OUT/OUT ADJUST button will flash rapidly , while the IN/REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJSUT button indicator turns off. 2. Press the REV 1 /FWDá button, or rotate the jog dial. ö The loop-out point will change in one-frame units. ö The loop-out point cannot be moved to a location before the loop- in point. ö If the OUT/OUT ADJUST button is pressed, or 30 seconds is allowed to elapse, the loop adjust mode will be canceled and op- eration will return to normal loop play . ö The loop-out point cannot be adjusted during reverse play . ö In the case of MP3 play , loop adjustment can be performed only within the same track where the cue point is set. â T o return to a loop (reloop) After cancellation of a loop, press the RELOOP/EXIT button during normal playback. ö Playback will return to the loop-in point of the previously set loop, and loop play will resume. ö In the case of MP3, reloop can be performed only within the same folder .
45 Advanced Operations Relay play with two players â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. Relay play can be performed by using the supplied accessory control cord to connect the CONTROL connectors of this player and another CDJ series CD player . ö Set the auto cue functions of the two players to ON (auto cue ( A.CUE ) indicator lights in the display). ö If connected to a DJ mixer , set the mixer â s fader control to its center position. 1. Begin playback on the first player . 2. When the currently playing track ends, the other player (in standby mode) will automatically begin playback. 3. Set the first player to cue standby at the beginning of the next desired track. ö By repeating these steps, you can perform continuous automatic relay play between the two players. ö By replacing the disc on the waiting player and cueing it to a de- sired track, an unending variety of tracks can be played. ö By setting a cue point on the waiting player , playback can be set to begin automatically from any point in any desired track ( â P .40, â Setting cue pointsâ ). Notes: ö Relay play may not occur smoothly if the two players â audio output terminals are not connected to the same DJ mixer . ö If power is interrupted to the currently playing player , the other player will automatically begin playback. ö Since fader start and relay play require that the same control connectors be connected in different ways, they cannot be performed simultaneously . â Automatic loop setting 4-beat loop During playback, press the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button. ö The normal loop playback indicators will appear ( OUT/OUT AD- JUST and IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST buttons will flash). ö The point at which the button is pressed will become the loop-in point, and a loop-out point will be set automatically as described below; loop playback will then continue between the two points. ÷ If the immediately preceding BPM value is known, a point four beats afterwards will become the loop-out point. ÷ If the immediately preceding BPM value is not known, the loop- out point will be set four seconds after the loop-in point. ö When the RELOOP/EXIT button is pressed, the loop play will end and normal playback will resume. ö 4-beat loop cannot be designated during reverse play . One-track loop (chapter/track repeat) During playback, hold the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button de- pressed for 1 second or more. When the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button is held depressed for 1 second or more during playback, one-track loop is enabled, thus repeating play- back of the currently playing chapter or track. ö The indicator â CHAPTER LOOPâ (during DVD playback) or â TRACK LOOP â (during CD or MP3 playback) will appear in the display , and the unit will search to the beginning of the currently playing chapter or track, and set the loop-in point there. ö The normal loop playback indicators will appear ( OUT/OUT ADJUST and IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST buttons will flash), and the chap- ter end or track end will be automatically set at the loop-out points and playback will resume. ö If the RELOOP/EXIT button is pressed, the loop play will be canceled and normal playback will resume. ö When recording to a memory card, record after playing the track to the end. ö One-track loop cannot be designated during reverse play . [Back & Forth Loop Mode] ö When the BACK & FORTH button is pressed so that the loop mode indicator lights, loop play will change to the back & forth loop mode. ö During the back & forth loop mode, repeated playback is performed in the forward direction from loop-in point to loop-out point, followed by reverse playback from the loop-out point to the loop-in point. ö If the BACK & FORTH button is pressed again so that the loop mode indicator goes out, playback will return to normal loop mode. Reverse play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. Set the DIRECTION FWD/REV select switch to the REV posi- tion (forward). The reverse indicator will light and play will commence in the reverse direction. ö The jog dial â s operation to accelerate/decelerate playback is reversed. ö During reverse playback, loop points cannot be set nor loop-out points modified. ö When track search or loop play are performed, the jog dial â s audio/ video memory status display will flash for 1 to 2 seconds and scratch/ reverse operations may not respond. About fader start play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. When the accessory control cord is used to connect this player â s CON- TROL connector to the CONTROL connector of a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately), the operation of the DJ mixer â s channel fader lever can be used to release the player from cue standby and start playback instantly . Fader start can also be started by using the cross fader operation; when the fader lever is returned to its original position, the player also returns to its cue point (back cue) and enters cue standby .
46 Advanced Operations T o view guide displays Press the DISPLA Y button to turn the guide displays ON/OFF . In the DJ mode, onscreen guide displays are not output to the main video output ( VIDEO OUT) connectors; in this case, the button operates to enable and disable the guide displays (hot cue, cue point, playing time, etc.) output to the preview video output ( PREVIEW OUT) connectors. [DVD playback in DJ mode] CUE C B A Guide display ON Guide display OFF In the NORMAL mode, pressing the DISPLA Y button turns the guide display ON/OFF on both the main video and preview video outputs. Press- ing the DISPLA Y button changes the display contents in the following way: [DVD playback in NORMAL mode] ö Chapter and time may not be displayed with some titles. * T ransmission rate is a value indicating the data volume recorded on the DVD. While higher transmission rates indicate larger amounts of data, they do not necessarily translate to higher picture quality . Play 2 â 2 0. 30 T itle âÂÂ121. 13/121. 43 Play 2 â 2 0. 30 Chapter 0. 10/ 5. 43 Play 2 â 2 0. 30 Chapter âÂÂ5. 33/ 5. 43 Play T r .Rate: 2âÂÂ2 0. 30 8. 6 Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time Remaining title time T otal title time Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time Elapsed chapter time T otal chapter time Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time Remaining chapter time T otal chapter time Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time T ransmission rate (*) level meter T ransmission rate level Display OFF 0 F O LDE R 00 F O LDE R F O LDE R 08 F O LDE R 09 F O LDE R 10MUS.m p3 11MUS.m p3 12MUS.m p3 13MUS.m p3 2 F O LDE R 3 F O LDE R 04FOLDER 05MUS.m p3 06MUS.m p3 MEN U ENTER O p e n RET U R N To p Exi t O 0 7F O LDE R 20MUS.m p3 21MUS.m p3 22MUS.m p3 MEN U ENTER O p e n RET U R N To p Exi t 7FOLDER 7 F O LDE R 7 F O LDE R 8 F O LDE R 09FOLDER 10MUS.m p3 11MUS.m p3 12MUS.m p3 13MUS.m p3 Selecting tracks with MP3 navigator (MP3 only) 1. Press the MENU button. ö The MP3 navigator screen will be displayed. Currently open folder Folder T rack 2. Use the up ( ) or down ( ) side of the cursor button to select the desired track or the folder holding the desired track. 3. With the cursor placed over a folder , press the ENTER button to open the selected folder . ö The folder can also be opened by pressing the right side ( ) of the cursor button. ö Pressing the left side ( ) of the cursor button will cause the dis- play to return to the next higher folder level. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the desired track. 5. Press ENTER. ö Playback of the selected track will begin. When the cursor is moved over a folder , press the ENTER button to display the folderâ s con- tents. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT ENTER MENU DISPLA Y
47 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) Operations Using Memory Cards â Using memory cards This player supports the use of SD memory cards or MultiMedia Cards for the recording of disc identification data, cue point data, loop point data, and hot cue data. Data regarding cue points and loop points include each point â s position, as well as audio channel, angle, and thumbnail image. Thumbnail images cannot be recorded, however , in the case of copy-protected discs (included those using Macrovision technologies). â SD memory cards must be formatted in accordance with â SD Memory Card Specifications Part2 FILE SYSTEM SPECIFICA- TION V ersion 1.0 â (commercially purchased SD memory cards are factory formatted to the above standards). Unformatted cards cannot be used (the â UNFORMA T â message will be dis- played). â Memory cards formatted on computers or in digital cameras may not be usable with this player . â MultiMedia Cards (MMC) formatted on the CDJ-1000 or CDJ- 1000MK2 have the following limitations: ö DVD and MP3 data cannot be recorded. ö Loop data set in hot cues cannot be recorded. ö It is not possible to use a computer to copy or backup the cards. ö When recording loop points, a single loop point requires two points of memory area. ö The cards cannot be reformatted in this unit. â Loading a memory card Open the memory card door , and insert the memory card, label side up and with the beveled edge toward the front. Insert the card slowly , hold- ing it flat, and push it in until it stops. Shut the memory card door . The display will show â SD CARD â (for cards conforming to the SD memory card standard) or â CDJ CARD â (for cards formatted with the CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2), followed by the number of discs whose data are recorded on the card. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV CUE MEMORY CUE Memory CARD indicator Label surface up Memory card Memory card door T o protect important data ö Set the write-protect switch to the LOCK position to prevent fur - ther writing to the card. Return the switch to its original position if you wish to record further data on the card. ö The CARD indicator lights while the recorder is writing data to the disc. During this period, do not attempt to remove the card, or disconnect power to the unit, since card data may be destroyed. Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for damage to or loss of data recorded on memory cards, or other incidental damages arising from such loss. Rear view Write-protect switch Notes: ö Do not open the card door or turn off power while the CARD indicator is flashing, since the recorded data may be dam- aged. ö Memory cards are precision electronic devices. Do not bend or drop them, or subject them to strong forces or impacts. Also, avoid using or storing memory cards in environments subject to static electricity or electrical noise. ö Memory cards can be broken when subjected to impacts or static electricity . Be very careful when handling them, and make regular backups of important recorded data ( â P . 50). ö Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for damage to or loss of data recorded on memory cards, or other incidental dam- ages arising from such loss. Recording to memory cards ö Up to 100 points (total of both cue and loop points) can be stored for each disc. When 100 points have been stored, attempts to record further points will result in the display of the â POINT FULL â mes- sage, and no further points can be recorded. ö If insufficient memory space exists on the card to record the current points, the â CARD FULL â message will appear . ö If the card has been set to write-protect, the â CARD PROTECTEDâ message will be displayed. â Recording a cue point 1. Use the auto cue function or CUE button to input a cue point. 2. Press the MEMORY button. ö The display will show the cue point position data, and the word â CARD MEMORYâ will appear in the display , indicating that the cue point has been stored in the memory card. ö If no memory card is loaded, the â NO CARDâ message will ap- pear . ö If the memory card door is open without any memory card being loaded, the message â CLOSE CARD DOOR â will appear in the display . ö Removing the memory card Open the memory card door and wait until the CARD indicator lamp goes out, then press in the memory card slightly and allow it to eject; grasp the end of the card and pull out carefully .
48 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV ENTER CUE/LOOP CALL MEMORY C A B HOT CUE HOT CUE REC MODE ENTER â Message displays during recording of cue and loop points Player display â CARD MEMORYâ â CANNOT MEMORIZE ON THIS CARDâ â CARD FULLâ â CARD PROTECTEDâ â INTERNAL MEMORYâ , followed by â NO CARDâ â INTERNAL MEMORYâ , followed by â CLOSE CARD DOORâ â UNFORMA T â â CARD ERRORâ â POINT FULLâ â CARD MEMORYâ , followed by â PICTURE IS NOT RECORDEDâ Contents Cue point or loop point data have been successfully recorded on the memory card. Displayed during DVD/MP3 playback, when a memory card formatted and recorded using the CDJ- 1000 or CDJ-1000MK2 has been loaded on this unit and an attempt is made to record data to the card. Point data cannot be recorded. Insufficient space remains on the memory card. Point data cannot be recorded to the card. The memory card â s LOCK (write protect) function is enabled, and further point data cannot be recorded on the card. No memory card is loaded. A memory card is loaded, but the memory card door has not been closed. Close the door and retry . Displayed when the loaded memory card does not conform to SD memory card standards, or has not been formatted to CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2 (MMC) standards. Point data cannot be recorded on the card. The loaded memory card appears to be damaged. Displayed when the total number of recorded cue points and loop points has already reached 100. Displayed when an attempt is made to record points from a copy-protected disc. Thumbnail image is not recorded. Insert memory card whenever recording cue point data, loop point data, hot cue data, or W A VE data. If no memory card is inserted, any designated setting data will be lost when the power is turned off or the disc is removed. â Recording a loop point 1. Set a loop-in point and loop-out point and begin loop play- back. 2. During loop playback, press the MEMORY button. ö The display will show the cue point position data, and the word â CARD MEMORYâ will appear in the display , indicating that the loop-in and loop-out points have been stored in the memory card. ö If no memory card is loaded, the â NO CARDâ message will ap- pear . ö If the memory card door is open without any memory card being loaded, the message â CLOSE CARD DOOR â will appear in the display . â Recording hot cue points A, B, C Hot cue points A, B, and C are automatically recorded on the memory card. â W A VE display Wave displays are automatically recorded on the memory card. * As one example of the use of a 32 MB SD memory card, up to 75 discs â worth of cue and loop points can be recorded per card (assum- ing use of DVD discs with 20 points per disc, and recording of thumb- nail images for each point). T o recall data recorded on memory cards â T o recall a recorded cue or loop point 1. Press the CUE/LOOP CALL button. ö The preview monitor screen will display the cue point navigation menu. 1âÂÂ006 0.00.39 CUE ENTER CALL C B A While the call screen is displayed, point information is also shown on the player â s display .
49 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) If thumbnail images are not recorded, the memory point time data for the cue points or loop points will be displayed instead. Point information is also shown on the main unit â s display, allowing you to select points even without a preview monitor . 2. Use the cursor button ( / / / ) to select the desired thumbnail image, and press the ENTER button. While reading data from a memory card, the main unit â s display will show the âÂÂCUE Readin â or â LOOP Readin â message. ö The cue point or loop point will be read into the player , and the memory point time will be displayed; the player will search for the cue point and enter cue standby there. CUE C B A â T o read a cue/loop point into a hot cue 1. Press the CUE/LOOP CALL button. ö The preview monitor screen will display the cue point navigation menu. 1 âÂÂ00 1 0.11.05 CUE ENTER CALL C B A While the call screen is displayed, point information is also shown on the play- er â s display. 2. Use the cursor button to select the desired thumbnail im- age, and press the HOT CUE REC MODE button so that the HOT CUE A, B, and C button indicators light red. Then press the button (A, B, or C) into which you wish to store the hot cue point. While reading data from the memory card, the main unit â s display will show the â HOT * Readin â message. ö Playback will begin when data reading is completed. CUE C B A ö When playing a copy-protected disc, thumbnail image of set point data cannot be recorded to the memory card. 1 âÂÂ001 0.23 1 âÂÂ002 0.04 1 âÂÂ003 0.05 1 âÂÂ004 0.02 1 âÂÂ004 0.07 1 âÂÂ006 0.00 1 âÂÂ006 0.06 1 âÂÂ006 0.12 1 âÂÂ006 0.20 1 âÂÂ006 0.28 1 âÂÂ006 0.45 1 âÂÂ006 1.11 1 âÂÂ00 6 0.06.00 CUE ENTER CALL C B A ö Cue point navigation screen when CD is loaded. TRK âÂÂ01 0.35 TRK âÂÂ01 0.39 TRK âÂÂ01 3.57 TRK âÂÂ03 0.11 TRK â 01 0.39.60 CUE ENTER CALL C B A ö Cue point navigation screen displays during MP3 playback are as fol- lows. â â NTER C ALL 01 â 001 0 . 03 01 â 008 0 . 06 01 â 004 0 .1 1 01 â 003 0 . 01 â T o recall recorded hot cue points Hot cue points A, B, and C are automatically recorded on the memory card. If points have been previously recorded for a disc, when that disc is inserted the HOT CUE buttons A , B, and C will begin flashing green or orange. T o call one of the recorded hot cue points, press the correspond- ing button A , B , or C . The flashing green or orange button will change to light steadily (sound will not begin instantly when a point is called up). If you have no need of calling one of the hot cue points, press the HOT CUE REC MODE button. The indicators will change to red, and the hot cue setting mode will be enabled. (T o subsequently call up one of the hot cue points previously recorded on the memory card, remove the disc or memory card and reinsert it so that the A , B , and C buttons flash once again. Then press the desired flashing button). â W A VE display When playing a track with which you have previously used the W A VE display function, the recorded W A VE pattern will automatically be re- called and displayed. Point information is also shown on the main unit â s display, allowing you to select points even without a preview monitor .
50 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) T o delete information recorded on memory cards â T o delete individual cue/loop points 1. Press the CUE/LOOP CALL button. ö The preview monitor screen will display the cue point navigation menu. 2. Use the cursor button ( / / / ) to select the thumbnail of the cue point you wish to erase, then press the DE- LETE button. ö The display will show the â DELETEâ message, and the selected cue point or loop point data will be erased from the memory card. â T o delete all cue/loop point information for an entire disc 1. Load the disc whose cue/loop point information you wish to erase. 2. Hold the DELETE button depressed for 5 or more seconds. ö The display will scroll the â DISC DELETE? PUSH MEMORYâ con- firmation message. 3. Press the MEMORY button. ö All cue and loop data for the loaded disc will be deleted from the memory card. ö If any button other than the MEMORY button is pressed, the de- lete mode will be canceled. â T o delete all memory card data 1. With no disc loaded, hold the DELETE button depressed for 5 seconds or more. ö The display will scroll the â ALL DELETE? PUSH MEMORYâ con- firmation message. 2. Press the MEMORY button. ö All data will be deleted from the memory card. ö If any button other than the MEMORY button is pressed, the de- lete mode will be canceled. T o copy memory card data 1. With no disc or memory card loaded: Hold the MEMORY button pressed for 5 seconds or more. ö The display will scroll the â COPY MODEâ â CARD A INâ mes- sages. 2. Insert the original source memory card into the memory card slot. ö The display will show the â READINGâ message; after several min- utes, the â CARD B IN â message will appear . 3. Remove the source card and insert the target memory card. ö Be sure to delete earlier contents of the target card to provide sufficient recording capacity . ö The display will show the â WRITINGâ message, and after several minutes, the â CARD A IN â message will appear . 4. Remove the target card, and once more insert the origi- nal source card. ö The display will show the â READINGâ message; after several min- utes, the â CARD B IN â message will appear . 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required. ö The copying process is completed when the display shows the â COMPLETEâ message. ö Copying of a full 32 MB memory card will require a maximum of 3 cycles of recording steps 3 and 4. ö If the target card has insufficient memory capacity to complete the copying process, the â CAP ACITY ERROR â message will ap- pear . ö If you possess a computer with memory card reader , the reader can be used to copy your memory cards. (A computer cannot be used to copy Multimedia cards (MMC) formatted with the CDJ-1000 or CDJ- 1000MK2.) â P .47, precautions regarding memory card formatting. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV CUE/LOOP CALL MEMORY DELETE
51 Other (T roubleshooting) T roubleshooting Incorrect operations can be mistaken as malfunctions. If you believe the unit is not operating correctly , consult the chart be low . Sometimes incorrect operation may be due to a malfunction in another component. If the problem is not fixed, check the other components used with the player . If the problem still persists, contact your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or dealer for service. Symptom No power . Discs donâÂÂt eject when the EJECT ( 0 ) button is pressed. Playback doesnâÂÂt start when a disc is inserted. Playback stops immediately after starting. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs cannot be played. â NOT VIDEO FORMA T â is displayed. CanâÂÂt play DVD. The marks appear . MP3 canâÂÂt be played. CanâÂÂt search for MP3 files. Images donâÂÂt appear on screen. No sound. Sound is distorted or has noise. Certain discs produce much noise. Playback is interrupted. DVDs and CDs produce different sound volumes. When auto cue function is ON, track search does not end. During playback, back cue doesnâÂÂt occur when CUE button is pressed. Loop play doesnâÂÂt start when OUT/ OUT ADJUST button is pressed. Auto cue setting is not retained. All settings cannot be returned to their factory defaults. Probable Diagnosis ö Power cord isnâÂÂt connected. ö The eject/stop mode select switch is set to LOCK . ö Auto cue function is set to ON. ö Disc is loaded with label side down. ö Disc is fogged or dirty. ö The disc has a differ ent region number . ö Disc isnâÂÂt recorded in video format. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂDJ âÂÂ. Some DVDs are constructed to prohibit playing in DJ mode. ö Operation is pr ohibited by disc or player . ö Format is wrong. ö Y ou attempted to search (fast forward/reverse) for files in a different folder . ö Output cables are loose or not connected correctly . ö Impr oper operation of television or video mixer , etc. ö Output cables ar e loose or not connected correctly . ö Impr oper operation of audio mixer . ö Connectors or plugs ar e dirty . ö Player is set to pause mode. ö Output cables are not connected correctly. ö Connectors or plugs ar e dirty . ö Electromagnetic influence from television. ö Disc has large scratches. ö Disc is ver y dirty . ö Due to difference in recording formats. ö If intervals between tracks is very long, track search takes longer . ö If a non-recorded intervals continue for more than 10 seconds, play will not begin unless auto cue function is turned OFF . ö No cue point is set. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL âÂÂ. ö With DVD, some discs do not support DJ operations during playback. ö When playing MP3, cue point is in another folder . ö No cue point (loop-in point) has been set. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL âÂÂ. ö Cue points and angle, audio settings are different. ö With DVD, some discs do not support point DJ operations during playback. ö The power was turned off right after settings were made or changed. Remedy ö Connect power cord properly . ö Set the player to pause mode or cue standby mode then press EJECT ( 0) button. ö Set the eject/stop mode selector switch to UNLOCK then press EJECT ( 0 ) button. ö Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 1 second or more to turn the auto cue function off. ö Reload the disc with label side up. ö Clean the disc. ö Check the disc for correct region number . If it is not correct, it cannot be played on this unit. ö Record disc in video format. ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â NORMALâÂÂ. ö Perform correct operation. ö See section â Playing MP3 filesâ on page 10. ö MP3 searches can be performed only within the same folder . ö Connect correctly . ö Confirm settings of television or video mixer , etc. ö Connect cables correctly . ö Check audio mixerâ s switches and volume settings. ö Clean connectors and plugs. ö Press PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to begin playback. ö Connect cables correctly to audio mixer line input connectors. Do not connect to MIC connector . ö Clean connectors and plugs. ö T urn off television or move farther away . ö Replace disc. ö Clean disc. ö Not a malfunction. ö Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 1 second or more to turn auto cue function OFF . ö Set a cue point. ( â P .40) ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Play back a part supporting DJ operations. ö Back cue with MP3 can be performed only within the same folder . ö Set a loop-in point. ( â P .44) ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Set angle and audio conditions the same. ö Play a part supporting DJ operations. ö Wait 10 seconds before turning off the unit after changing settings.
52 Other (T roubleshooting) Symptom Jog dial doesn â t respond. Jog dial performs different operation from that intended. DJ operations don âÂÂt respond. With power ON, disc stops. Screen images stops and com- mands don â t respond. Setting items don âÂÂt appear on Setup Menu. Digital sound isn â t reproduced. 96 kHz audio is not output in digital. DTS audio is not reproduced. Image appears stretched horizon- tally or vertically . During DVD playback, image is distorted or dark. Subtitles don âÂÂt appear . Can â t open Setup Menu. When angle is changed, playback is momentarily interrupted. When audio format is changed, playback is momentarily interrupted. Title or chapter search command doesn â t respond. Can â t begin playback from title or chapter designated before loading disc. Cue point navigation menu doesn â t display thumbnail images. Cue point memory cannot be recorded. Can â t use SD memory cards. Probable Diagnosis ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL â . ö Jog mode is incorrect. ö Hyper -jog mode is incorrect. ö With DVD, some discs do not support point DJ operations during playback. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL â . ö With DVD, some discs or players do not support point DJ operations during playback. ö â DISABLE DJ MODEâ is displayed. ö With DVD, DJ operations not be possible when playback is performed from the Setup Menu. ö If left in pause mode without command input for 100 minutes or more, player automatically stops disc rotation. ö Disc rotation stops with disc playback completes last track. ö Operations prohibited on some discs. ö Setup Menu is set for [ Basic ] mode. ö [ Digital Out ] option is set to [ Off]. ö [ 96kHz PCM Out ] option is set to [ 96kHz 3 48kHz ]. ö Some discs prohibit 96 kHz output. ö Amplifier or decoder does not support DTS audio. ö [ TV Screen ] option settings are incorrect. ö S-terminal video output connection is incorrect. ö Disc is equipped with analog copy protect technology . ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂDJ â . (Subtitles aren âÂÂt displayed in DJ mode) ö Setup cannot be performed during playback in DJ mode. ö In DJ mode, a special playback mode is used so changing the angle causes temporary playback interruption. ö In DJ mode, a special playback mode is used so changing the audio causes temporary playback interruption. ö With DVD, some discs do not support certain operations. ö With DVD, some discs require playback from a specified place. ö Disc is copy protected. ö No memory card is loaded. ö Disc loaded is CD. ö During DVD/MP3 play , the inserted memory card was recorded on a CDJ-1000, CDJ-1000MK2. ö No memory card is loaded. ö SD memory card has been set for write-protect. ö SD memory card not loaded. ö SD memory card has been set for write-protect. ö SD memory card not formatted properly . Remedy ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Press the JOG MODE button to select desired jog mode (VINYL ON/OFF). ö Press the HYPERJOG MODE button to select desired mode. ö Play a part supporting DJ operations. ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Play a part supporting DJ operations. ö DJ operations are not supported here. Play a part of the disc supporting DJ operations. ö Press PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to resume playback. Or press EJECT ( 0) button to remove disc. ö Press the STOP button, then begin playback again. ö Set Setup Menu to [ Expert ] mode. ö Set [ Digital Out ] option to [ On ]. ö Set [ 96kHz PCM Out] option to [ 96kHz ]. ö Press audio button to select audio format other than DTS. ö Set [ TV Screen] options properly . ö Due to television signal processing, images may appear lengthened horizontally or vertically . In this case, set [ S-Video Out ] option to [ S1 ]. ö Not a malfunction. ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â NORMALâÂÂ. ö Stop playback before performing settings. ö Perform settings in NORMAL mode. ö Not a malfunction. ö Not a malfunction. ö Not a malfunction. ö Not a malfunction. ö If the disc includes a copy-protect signal, thumbnail images cannot be recorded to the memory card. ö Insert memory card formatted in compliance with SD memory card standards. ö Thumbnail images are not displayed with CDs. ö DVD/MP3 data cannot be recorded to multimedia cards (MMC) recorded on a CDJ- 1000 or CDJ-1000MK2. ö Insert memory card formatted in compliance with SD memory card standards. ö Set write-protect switch to allow writing to card. ö Insert SD memory card. ö Set write-protect switch to allow writing to card. ö Insert memory card formatted in compliance with SD memory card standards.
53 Other (T roubleshooting) ö This component may fail to operate properly due to influence of static electricity or other external influences. In this case, try turning off the POWER switch, and turn on the power again only when the disc has fully stopped rotating. ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in video format unless they have been finalized. ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format. ö This unit cannot play partially recorded CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been finalized. ö This unit plays only standard 12 cm discs and 8 cm discs mounted in proper disc adapters; it cannot play irregularly shaped dis cs (damage or malfunctions may occur). ö When playing 8 cm discs mounted on adapters, some speed loss may be experienced when using scratch and reverse operations. This unit for high performance when rotating discs at high speed, but when 8 cm discs are mounted in adapters, the rotation spe ed is reduced for safety . This is not a malfunction. ö BPM values measured with this unit may differ from published values found on DVD or CD labels, or those measured on Pioneer DJ mixers. This is a result of differences in BPM measuring methods, and is not a malfunction. ö When playing DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-RW discs, some degradation in performance may be experienced depending on the recording quality of the individual disc. ö This unit supports analog copy-pr otection technology . Some discs include copy-protection signals and when such discs are played , some images may display horizontal stripes or other distortions, this is not a malfunction. Also, when viewing or recording ima ges through a VTR, the copy guard device may prevent proper playback. ö In DJ mode, the following option values change, regardless of the setting of the Setup Menu. Setup Menu item Setting value [ TV Screen]: [ 4:3 (Letter Box) ] (The 4:3(Pan&Scan) format is not supported in DJ mode.) [ Still Picture]: [ Auto] [ Angle indicator]: [ Off] ö When playing DVDs, the same disc may display different playback patterns when played in DJ mode and NORMAL mode. ö SD memory cards formatted using ordinary computer OS formatting software are not generally compatible with SD memory card standards. Error message display When the unit is unable to operate properly , an error code is displayed on the display panel. Check the error code displayed against the following table and take the recommended action to correct the error . If an error code other than any of the error codes listed in the table below is displayed or if the same error code is displayed even after corrective action has been taken, contact your nearest Pioneer Service Station or contact the store from which you purchased your player for assistance. Error code E â 72 01 E â 83 01 E â 83 02 E â 83 03 E-83 04 E-83 05 E â 91 01 E â 72 02 Error type TOC READ ERROR PLA YER ERROR MP3 DECODE ERROR DA T A FORMA T ERROR MECHANICAL TIME OUT WRONG REGION NO. Error content Can â t read TOC data. Can â t play this disc properly . Loaded disc cannot be played properly . Mechanical operation did not end within specified time. Does not match supported region number . Cause and remedy Disc is cracked. = Replace disc. Disc is dirty . = Clean disc. If other discs operate normally , pr oblem is with this disc. Does not conform to MP3 format. = Change to disc conforming to MP3 format. Foreign object in disc loading slot. = Remove foreign object. Confirm the region number for the disc. Discs cannot be played if their region number is not supported.
54 Other (Dot Matrix Guide Display Messages) Message LOAD IN END EJECT NO DISC STOP RESUME STILL PLA Y P AUSE SEARCH á 1, á 2, á 3 1 1, 1 2, 1 3 CHAPTER LOOP TRACK LOOP NO TRACK DISABLE DJ MODE NOT VIDEO FORMA T SETUP MENU NO TEXT NORMAL DJ MODE SD CARD CDJ CARD *****DISCS CARD MEMORY CANNOT MEMORIZE ON THIS CARD CARD FULL CARD PROTECTED INTERNAL MEMORY NO CARD Event/Display T iming Displayed when loading a disc. Displayed at end of playback. Displayed during ejection of a disc. Displayed when no disc is loaded. Displayed when the STOP button is pressed. Displayed during resume mode. Displayed when playing a still image during DVD playback in NORMAL mode. Displayed during DVD playback in NORMAL mode. Displayed during DVD pause mode in NORMAL mode. Displayed during DVD chapter search or title search in NORMAL mode. Displays DVD fast forward speed in NORMAL mode. Displays DVD fast reverse speed in NORMAL mode. Displayed when one-track loop command is received during DVD playback. Displayed when one-track loop command is received during CD or MP3 playback. Displayed when the CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW disc loaded contains no MP3 files. Displayed during DVD play in DJ mode, when attempting an operation at a point not sup- ported in DJ mode. Displayed when playing a DVD not recorded in video format (VR format, DVD audio or DVD- ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW discs containing no MP3 files, etc.). Displayed when television monitor shows setup menu screen. Displayed when showing menu or top menu during DVD play . Displayed when no supported text data is available. Displayed when power is turned on in NOR- MAL mode, or when switching the NORMAL/ DJ switch to NORMAL mode. Also displayed when a button is pressed or operation at- tempted that is not supported in NORMAL mode. Displayed when switching to DJ mode. Displayed when a memory card conforming to SD memory card standards is loaded. Displayed when a memory card formatted on CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2 is loaded. Displayed when a memory card is loaded, following the above display; indicates number of disc data recorded on the card. Displayed when cue point or loop point data is recorded to memory card. When playing DVD/MP3, displayed when attempting to record to a card formatted on CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2. Displayed when the loaded memory card has insufficient capacity . Displayed when the write-protect (LOCK) function has been set on the loaded memory card. Displayed when attempting to record cue point or loop point data without a properly loaded memory card. Displayed when no memory card is loaded. Message CLOSE CARD DOOR UNFORMA T CARD ERROR POINT FULL PICTURE IS NOT RECORDED READ ERROR CUE POINT LOOP POINT NO POINT CUE Readin LOOP Readin HOT A Readin HOT B Readin HOT C Readin COPY -MODE CARD A IN READING CARD B IN WRITING COMPLETE CAP ACITY ERROR NO DA TA DISC DELETE ? PUSH MEMORY ALL DELETE ? PUSH MEMORY DELETE A.CUE-**dB AUTO PA L NTSC factory defaults Event/Display Timing Displayed when a memory card is loaded, but the memory card door has not been closed. Displayed when the card loaded does not conform to SD memory card standards, or was not formatted on a CDJ-1000, CDJ-1000MK2 (MMC). Displayed to indicate corrupted memory card. Displayed when the total number of cue points and loop points recorded has already reached 100. Displayed when setting a point for a copy- protected disc. Displayed when the card inserted contains corrupted data. Displayed when using cue point navigation to select cue point data. Displayed when using cue point navigation to select loop point data. Displayed when point data is not recorded with cue point navigation. Displayed when using cue point navigation to read in (call) cue point data. Displayed when using cue point navigation to read in (call) loop point data. Displayed when reading in (calling) hot cue A data from cue point navigation, or when hot cue point is reread after loading a disc. Displayed when reading in (calling) hot cue B data from cue point navigation, or when hot cue point is reread after loading a disc. Displayed when reading in (calling) hot cue C data from cue point navigation, or when hot cue point is reread after loading a disc. Displayed when beginning memory card copy mode. Displayed in copy mode when no source memory card is loaded. Displayed in copy mode when reading data from source memory card. Displayed in copy mode when no destination memory card is loaded. Displayed in copy mode when writing data to destination memory card. Displayed when memory card copying is completed. Displayed when destination memory card has insufficient capacity . Displayed when source memory card contains no data. Confirmation screen displayed when erasing cue point/loop point memory data from memory card in units of disc. Confirmation screen displayed when erasing all data from memory card. Displayed while erasing data from memory card. Displays auto cue level. Displayed when TV system setting for video output is set to AUTO. Displayed when TV system setting for video output is set to P AL. Displayed when TV system setting for video output is set to NTSC. Displayed when all settings have been returned to their factory default values. Dot Matrix Guide Display Messages
55 Other (Specifications) 1. General T ype of Unit ........................................................ DVD video, CD Power ............................................................... AC 120 V , 60 Hz Power consumption .......................................................... 42 W Operating environment temperature ........................................ 5 ð C to 35 ð C ( 41 ð F to 95 ðF) Operating environment humidity ............................... 5 % to 85 % (RH) without condensation Weight ................................................................ 5.4 kg (11.9 lb) External dimensions ............................. 320 mm (W) à408 mm (D) à109 mm (H) 12 5/8 in. (W) à16 1/16 in. (D) à4 5/16 in. (H) 2. Video output section Composite output (2) Output level ...................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Output connector sets ................................ RCA (1), BNC (1) S-Video output Y output level .................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C output level ................................ 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) (NTSC) 300 mVp-p (75 â¦) (P AL) Output connector ........................................................ S type 3. Preview video output section Composite output Output level ...................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Output connector ................................................... RCA type S-Video output Y output level .................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C output level ................................ 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) (NTSC) 300 mVp-p (75 â¦) (P AL) Output connector ........................................................ S type Specifications 4. Audio output section Audio output (2-channel) Audio output level .............................. 2.0 V rms (1 kHz, 0 dB) Channels .............................................................................. 2 Output connectors .................................................. RCA type Digital audio output response Frequency response (CD) ............................... 4 Hz to 20 kHz Frequency response (DVD [96 kHz] ) .............. 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio ........................................... 115 dB or above (JEIT A) T otal harmonic distortion ............................. 0.004 % (JEIT A) Digital output Coaxial digital output ..................................... RCA connector 5. Other connectors Control connector ........................................ Minijack ( ø 3.5 mm) Sync input connector .................................................. BNC type 6. Accessories ö Power cord .......................................................................... 1 ö Audio cable .......................................................................... 1 ö Video cable .......................................................................... 1 ö Control cord ......................................................................... 1 ö Forcible eject pin (mounted on unit â s bottom panel) ........... 1 ö Operating Instructions ......................................................... 1 ö Warranty card ...................................................................... 1 All specifications and descriptions are subject to change without notice. Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-com- mercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other me- dia), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com MPEG Layer -3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. 300 Allstate Parkway Markham, ON L3R OP2 (905) 479-4411 1 (877) 283-5901 For warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pio- neer Authorized Service Company in Canada. Alternatively , please contact the Customer Service Department at the following address: Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company , or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below . 800 â 421 â 1625 Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support Division at the above listed number for assistance. PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA), INC. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P .O. BOX 1760, LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. For warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product.
Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2006 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. Multimedia and Mass Storage Division: 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810, U.S.A. TEL: 800-444-OPTI (6784) PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. Industrial Products Department: 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 905-479-4411 Printed in Japan <DRB1413-A>
2 The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D1-4-2-3_En-A Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. P rotect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injur y from tip- over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. P1-4-2-2_En 11) 12) 13) 14) NOTE: THE NO USER-SERVICEABLE PAR TS COMPAR TMENT WARNING IS LOCA TED ON THE APPLIANCE BOTTOM.
3 NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â R eorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE â THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCA TED ON THE BOT TOM. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED W ARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY . D1-4-2-6-1_En This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil num érique de la Classe B est conforme àla norme NMB-003 du Canada. D8-10-1-3_EF Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user â s right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_En CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling D36-P4_A_En W ARNING T o prevent a fire hazar d, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 5 cm at rear , and 5 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it fr om overheating. T o prevent fire hazar d, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: top of the DVD drive CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8_B_En DRW2317-A If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En CAUTION The POWER switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
4 Before Operating Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished r eading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanat ory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. K015 En S001_En Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit you âÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now it âÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association âÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing â comfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormal â can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. T o establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , and without distortion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. T aking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. We W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely , your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association âÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet librar y , soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator , bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleaner , hair dr yer , noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw , pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research F oundation.
5 Before Operating Contents Before Operating Features ................................................................................... 6 Handling Precautions ............................................................... 8 Discs Usable with This Unit ..................................................... 9 Names and Functions of Parts ............................................... 12 Operation panel ................................................................ 12 Display .............................................................................. 14 Jog dial display ................................................................. 15 Rear panel ........................................................................ 15 Main video output (VIDEO OUT) and preview video output (PREVIEW OUT) ............................................................... 16 Connections ........................................................................... 17 1. Connections to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately) (audio output and control connector) ........................... 17 2. Control cord connection for relay play ......................... 18 3. Connection to stereo amplifier (without DJ mixer) ...... 18 4. Connection to component equipped with digital input connector .......................................... 18 5. Connection to television monitor (composite video/S-Video) ........................................... 19 6. Connection to video mixer ........................................... 20 7. Connecting the power cord ......................................... 20 Preparations Setup ...................................................................................... 21 TV system setting for video output .................................. 21 How to perform setup ...................................................... 21 Using the Setup Navigator ............................................... 21 Setup Menu items ............................................................ 23 T o return all settings to their factory defaults ................... 24 Using the Setup Menu ..................................................... 24 Advanced settings ............................................................ 25 Adjusting Dolby Digital audio ............................................ 25 Digital output setting ........................................................ 25 [Audio2] settings .............................................................. 26 [Video1] settings ............................................................... 27 Video quality adjust ........................................................... 28 [Video2] settings ............................................................... 29 [Language] Settings .......................................................... 30 Setting Parental Lock ....................................................... 33 Basic Operations Loading and Removing Discs ................................................. 35 Basic Operations .................................................................... 36 Beginning playback ........................................................... 36 Auto cue function ............................................................. 37 T o stop playback ............................................................... 37 T o eject the disc ............................................................... 37 T o temporarily interrupt playback (pause mode) ............... 37 T o change language/subtitle settings during playback (DVD only) ........................................................................ 37 Changing the viewing angle (DVD only) ........................... 38 Fast forward/fast reverse ................................................. 38 T rack search (skip) ............................................................ 39 T itle search (DVD only) ..................................................... 39 Folder search (MP3 only) .................................................. 39 Setting cue points ............................................................ 40 Changing playback speed ................................................. 40 Setting master tempo ...................................................... 41 Jog dial functions ............................................................. 41 Jog sensitivity adjustment ................................................ 41 About the W A VE display ................................................... 41 About the TEXT display .................................................... 42 Mixing different tracks (splicing) ...................................... 42 Advanced Operations Advanced Operations ............................................................. 43 Scratch play ...................................................................... 43 Hyper jog mode ................................................................ 43 Spin play ........................................................................... 43 Braking ............................................................................. 43 Hot cue ............................................................................. 43 Loop playback ................................................................... 44 Back & Forth Loop Mode ................................................. 45 Reverse play ..................................................................... 45 About fader start play ....................................................... 45 Relay play with two players .............................................. 45 Selecting tracks with MP3 navigator (MP3 only) .............. 46 T o view guide displays ...................................................... 46 Operations Using Memory Cards ........................................... 47 Recording to memory cards ............................................. 47 T o recall data recorded on memory cards ........................ 48 T o delete information recorded on memory cards ........... 50 T o copy memory card data ............................................... 50 Other T roubleshooting ...................................................................... 51 Error message display ...................................................... 53 Dot Matrix Guide Display Messages ...................................... 54 Specifications ......................................................................... 55
6 Before Operating (Features) Features This player has been designed to provide CD/DVD playback fea- tures and functions demanded by professional disco club DJs and VJs. It is a professional DVD player equipped with opera- tional ease, sound quality , and functions superior to those found on the professional analog players conventionally used by DJs. JOG DIAL Large-diameter (206 mm) dial for operating sensitivity ex- ceeding that possible with conventional analog turntables ö PITCH BEND Changes playback pitch in proportion to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. ö SCRA TCH PLA Y In VINYL mode, when the top surface of the jog dial is touched, playback stops and starts in response to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. The user can also adjust the sensitivity of start-up when the jog dial is touched and released, making pos- sible new DJ techniques. ö FRAME SEARCH When the jog dial is rotated during pause, the pause position is changed in units of individual frames (1/75th second). ö SUPER FAST SEARCH When the jog dial is rotated while depressing the manual search button, track search button or title/folder search button, the search will be performed more quickly than the conventional search or track search (or title/chapter search) functions. ö HYPER JOG MODE In VINYL mode, when the jog dial is rotated, the amount of sound or image change quadruples (x4) in response to the rotation. Per - formance possibilities are enhanced by employing this function together with the ordinary mode. JOG ADJUST This function allows you to adjust the felt resistance when rotat- ing the jog dial. ON JOG DISPLA Y The center of the jog dial is furnished with a display providing vari- ety of information, including disc status, cue point position, audio/ video memory status, jog touch detect display , and VINYL mode. W A VE DISPLA Y With an analog record, the user could look for the breaks in the grooves to use as mix points and end points. In the same way , the W A VE display reveals track br eaks in advance, allowing the DJ to use them as break points. CUE/LOOP MEMOR Y Cue points and loop points can be recorded for each disc on external SD memory cards or Multimedia cards (MMC), and re- called later as desired. HOT CUE Up to 3 hot cue points (A, B, C) can be recorded in advance and called up later for instant playback from those points. Hot cues can be used not only to record normal cue points, but also for loop point playback. REVERSE PLA Y By pulling the DIRECTION select switch toward the front (REV position), tracks can be played in reverse. TEMPO CONTROL High-performance 100 mm slider for precise adjustment of track speed Using a digital display with 0.02 % increments (within control range ñ6 %), the user can accurately and easily match the tem- pos of playback tracks. ö TEMPO CONTROL RANGE Four tempo control ranges are provided: ñ6 %, ñ10 %, ñ16 %, and WIDE. ö TEMPO CONTROL RESET This control allows tempo to be reset to the default 0 % status instantly , regardless of the slider position. ö MASTER TEMPO Allows pitch to be maintained while changing track speed. CUE ö BACK CUE By previously recording a cue point, it can be returned to instantly by pressing the CUE button during subsequent playback, thus starting playback again from that point. ö AUTO CUE This function cues a track by skipping the non-recorded portion before the beginning of music, setting the player to standby mode immediately before music begins. In this way , playback can be- gin instantly when the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed. ö CUE POINT SAMPLER This function allows one-touch playback from the cue points stored in memory , a convenient function for confirming cue points and sampling the points stored. REAL TIME SEAMLESS LOOP Allows simple setting and canceling of playback loops. Loops can be set quickly during track playback; also allows quick set- ting of a loop immediately before the end of a track, thus pre- venting the track from ending. In addition, loop functions have been facilitated by the addition of an ADJUST mode that allows one-touch modification of loop-in and loop-out points.
7 Before Operating (Features) RELOOP Once set, a loop can be returned to any number of times After canceling loop play , pressing the RELOOP/EXIT button causes playback to return and begin again from the previously set loop. T urning the function ON/OFF in time with the trackâ s rhythm allows a variety of new performance possibilities. 4-BEA T LOOP When the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button is pressed, the point at which the button is pressed is set as a loop-in point, and a loop-out point is set automatically 4 beats later , and automatic loop play is performed. ONE-TRACK LOOP When the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button is held depressed for one second or more, the chapter loop or track loop function is enabled. BACK & FORTH LOOP The Back & Forth Loop mode repeats playback in forward direc- tion from the loop-in point to loop-out point, followed by reverse play from the loop-out point to the loop-in point. PLA YING ADDRESS With an analog record, the position of the stylus gives the opera- tor an immediate grasp of the progress of playback. In the same way , the play address display shows a bar graph that provides an immediate visual grasp of the trackâ s playback progress. The current position in the track is indicated by the length of the bar; in addition, the bar flashes to warn that playback is approaching the end of the track. F ADER ST ART When the player is connected to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold sepa- rately), the mixerâ s fader operation can be used to perform fader start and back cue. MUL TI READ Discs readable on this player include CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in audio CD format or MP3), and DVD-R/DVD-RW (recorded in video format or MP3). However , since this player uses high-speed data read for the purposes of its DJ operations, some discs may not play back properly depending on the characteristics of the disc and the recorder , as well as a result of dirt or scratches on the disc, etc. MP3 DJ PLA Y This function allows use of the DJ function to play MP3 files re- corded on CD or DVD. PREVIEW MONITOR OUTPUT This is an auxiliary video output that produces an overlay display of operating information on the main video output screen, and provides the DJ with a visual aids when operating the unit. Dur - ing use of DVD play , cue points, loop points, and hot-cue points are shown as thumbnail displays overlain on the main output making possible interactive DJ operations. LEGA TO PRO The player is equipped with a digital filter that uses up-sampling technology (DVD: 48 kHz \ 192 kHz; CD: 44.1 kHz \ 176.4 kHz) for reproducing audio information lost in some disc (DVD, CD) for - mats. HI-BIT This function extends the bit length of audio data. By transform- ing 16-bit or 20-bit data to 24-bit, even minute signals can be reproduced with smooth, finely defined sound. DIGIT AL AUDIO OUT 96 kHz 24-bit digital audio output is supported in DJ mode as well as NORMAL mode. About DVD playback in DJ mode Since various special operations are supported in DJ mode, certain limitations are placed on normal playback functions such as SCAN. For this reason, operations which are possible in the NORMAL mode may be limited or disabled when attempted in DJ mode. In short, if you wish to use all ordinary DVD play functions, use the NORMAL mode. Limited or disabled functions (when in DJ mode) ö Cannot play sub-pictures (canâÂÂt display subtitles or onscreen but- tons) ö Cannot use password input command (when using interactive commands, the same operations may not produce the same results as when in NORMAL mode). ö May only play midway through titles. ö May skip certain parts of titles. ö Playback may be temporarily interrupted when switching audio functions. ö Playback may be temporarily interrupted when changing view- ing angle. ö Cannot use pan-and-scan function. ö The title itself may disallow use of DJ operations. In this case, DJ operations are prohibited, and the same operations are per - formed as when in NORMAL mode.
8 Before Operating (Handling Precautions) CUE DVJ-1000 Installation location ö Placing and using the player for long periods on heat-generat- ing sources such as amplifiers or near spotlights, etc. will af- fect product performance. A void placing the player on heat- generating sources. ö Install this player as far as possible away from tuners and TV sets. The player installed in close proximity to such equip- ment may cause noise or degradation of the picture. Noise may be noticeable when an indoor antenna is used. In such cases, make use of an outdoor antenna or turn off power to the player . ö When the unit is used in a loud-sound environment, e.g., near a speaker , sound skip may occur . Install the unit away from the speaker or reduce the listening volume. ö Place this unit on a level surface and a stable platform. T ake adequate note of the following precautions when pre- paring a place for installation: Be sure the player , including its video, audio and power supply cords, does not touch vibrating materials. Any vibration other than that transmitted through the insulators may cause the disc to skip. T ake special care when using the player while it is in- stalled in a carrying case. Do not place on or against vibrating materials! Leave space to allow for heat dissipation. Leave space to allow for heat dissipation. Leave space to allow for heat dissipation. Moving the unit â Never move the unit during playback! During playback, a disc rotates at very high speed; moving the player during playback may result in scratches or other damage to the disc. â When moving the unit is necessary Before moving the unit, remove any disc and disconnect the power . Malfunctions or damage may result if the unit is moved with a disc loaded. Also take care to prevent exposing the unit to heat or moisture during transport. About the carrying case The upper surface of the jog dial is equipped with a touch-sensi- tive switch. When placing the player in its carrying case, avoid placing any pressure on the jog dial. Condensation When this unit is brought into a warm room from previously cold surroundings or when the room temperature rises sharply , con- densation may form inside the unit and impair its performance. In such cases, disconnect the power cord and allow the unit to set for 1 to 2 hours, or raise the room temperature gradually before playing. Cleaning the player T o clean the player wipe with a polishing or a soft, dry cloth. For stubborn dirt, moisten a soft cloth with a weak solution of neu- tral detergent (diluted in five to six parts water), wring the cloth well, and wipe away the dirt. Use a dry cloth to wipe the surface dry . Do not use volatile liquids such as benzene or thinner which will damage the unit. About the lens cleaner The player's pickup lens should not become dirty in normal use. If for some reason, the lens becomes soiled and malfunctions, contact your nearest PIONEER authorized service center . Lens cleaners for DVD (CD) players are commercially available, but special care should be exercised in their use as some may cause damage to the lens. Regarding data recorded on memory cards It is the users responsibility to make regular backups of important memory card data. Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for damage to or loss of memory card data, or other incidental damages arising from incompatibilities of the player and memory card, static electric- ity or other external causes. Handling Precautions POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your near - est PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a re- placement. S002_En Lawful use of DVJ-1000: Copyright etc Neither Pioneer nor its dealers ar e r esponsible for the use made of the DVJ- 1000. The user must ensure it has all r elevant licences and consents in place (whether for copyright/public performance, performers rights, moral rights or other ewise) to allow the lawful use of the DVJ-1000. This is likely to include licences from or ganisations administering perform- ance rights in audio or video recor dings or consents from any other r elevant rights holders.
9 Before Operating (Discs Usable with This Unit) Discs Usable with This Unit T ypes of discs playable on this unit ö The following marks and logos are displayed on disc labels, packaging, or jackets. Note 1) About DVD-R disc playback: This player can play back DVD-R discs recorded in âÂÂDVD video â format or MP3. Note 2) About DVD-RW disc playback: ö This player can play back DVD-RW discs recorded in â DVD video â format or MP3. ö When playing a disc that has been edited on a DVD recorder , portions of the recording including links between tracks may appear as a momentary still image. ö When playing a disc that has been recorded or edited on a DVD recorder , the locations of edited portions may shift some- what. * For details, consult the Operating Instructions for your recorder . Note 3) Regarding CD-TEXT display: The number of characters that can be displayed is up to 72 for disc title, and 48 for track titles. Displays of 15 characters or more will scroll. Only alpha-numerics and a limited number of symbols can be displayed. Note 4) CD-R/CD-RW discs: This player supports playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded in audio CD format or MP3. * For details, consult the Operating Instructions for your recorder . When playing 8 cm CDs, always use an 8 cm CD adapter ( â P . 35). â The following discs cannot be played on this unit: ö DVD video discs not marketed for region â 1â or â ALLâ ö DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format ö DVD audio discs ö DVD-ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW discs containing no MP3 files ö DVD-RAM ö Video CDs ö CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW discs containing no MP3 files ö Photo CD ö DTS-CD, etc. Notes: ö Some DVD-R/DVD-RW and CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on standalone recorders or computer drives may not be playable back on this player , due to a variety of reasons, including disc characteristics, scratches, dirt, player lens dirt or condensa- tion, etc. ö Some discs recorded on computer drives may not be playable on this player , depending on the recording application used, its settings, and operating environment. Be sure to use the correct formatting for the discs used. For details, consult the application author . ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in video format unless they have been finalized. ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format. ö This unit cannot play partially recorded CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been finalized. ö For detailed information regarding the handling of DVD-R/DVD- RW and CD-R/CD-RW discs, consult the handling precautions printed on the disc case or otherwise supplied with each disc. â Regarding copy-control CDs This unit is designed to conform with audio CD standards. Op- eration is not guaranteed when playing CDs produced outside the normal CD standards. â About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content â video, audio, etc. â while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play . The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play . For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer . â Regarding DVD-R/DVD-RW , CD-R/CD-RW discs Due to the unique construction of DVD-R/DVD-RW and CD-R/ CD-RW discs, leaving them for extended periods of time in the pause (or cue standby) mode at a single point may result in the discs â becoming difficult to play at that place. The same symp- tom may also occur if the loop function is used to play back a single point on the disc excessively . As a result, users are advised to construct backup archive discs when playing discs containing important data. T ypes and Logos of playable discs DVD video DVD-R (Note 1) DVD-RW (Note 2) CD CD-TEXT (Note 3) CD-R (Note 4) CD-RW (Note 4) Note: This player does not support playback of 8 cm DVDs. Do not attempt to use adapters meant for 8 cm CDs, since the adapter may come loose during rotation, causing damage to the disc or player . is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
10 Before Operating (Discs Usable with This Unit) DVD operating limitations Some DVDs are designed explicitly to prevent the use of certain operations or to prevent changing operation methods. As a re- sult, the methods used to operate each disc may vary , and some techniques may not be usable with certain discs. In the event that a prohibited technique is attempted with a disc on this player , the display will show the disc operation prohibited mark . Also, certain other operations may not be supported on discs that sup- port menus or dialogue-type operations during playback. In such cases, the player operation prohibited mark will be displayed. Regarding copyright ö Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance, or rental of copyrighted discs is prohibited by law . ö This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Cor - poration, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Cor - poration. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Playing MP3 files MP3 files must follow the format requirements listed below. * This unit is not equipped with a sort function allowing playback by order of file names or ID3 tags. Playback is performed in the order tracks are recorded on the disc. * Plays MP3 files stored on CD or DVD. Cannot play MP3 files stored on SD memory cards or Multimedia cards (MMC). * Startup time increases with the number of folders. MP3 format Disc format MPEG-1 MPEG-2 ID3 tag File extension Folder levels Maximum number of folders Maximum number of files CD-R/CD-RW recording mode DVD-R/DVD-RW recording mode Supports Audio Layer-3 sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, Bit Rate 32 Kbps to 320 Kbps. Supports Audio Layer-3 sampling frequency 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, Bit Rate 16 Kbps (stereo) to 160 Kbps. Supports ID3 Vers. 1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4. Displays title, artist, album. .mp3, .MP3, .mP3, .Mp3 Maximum of 8 folders. Files located in folders exceeding 8 levels cannot be played. 99 (99 folders 1 root) 999 (per folder) Record in accordance with ISO9660 file system standards. Supports only Disc At Once or Track At Once. DVJ-1000 does not support Packet Write recorded discs. Record in accordance with ISO9660 file system standards. Does not support multi-border recording. Mark Meaning Number of recorded audio tracks Number of recorded subtitles Number of recorded angles Recorded aspect ratio Region number . This player can play discs marked with region â 1â or â ALLâ . 2 2 3 16 : 9 LB 1 ALL Marks displayed on DVD The following symbols and marks may be displayed on DVD la- bels or packaging:
11 Before Operating (Discs Usable with This Unit) Disc composition Digital V ersatile Discs (DVD) DVD video, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs are recorded in units called â titles,â with each title being divided into one or more sub-divi- sions called â chapters.â Further , some, discs are furnished with menus for navigating the disc, but menus may not be included with all titles. In the case of commercial films, a single movie normally corresponds to a single title. On so-called â karaokeâ discs, each song track composes a single title, although there are some exceptions to this rule, so care is needed when using search functions. Compact Discs (CD) In the case of compact discs, each disc is divided into units of individual tracks (normally , each song is contained on a single track). In addition, tracks may have sub-divisions called index numbers. T itle 1 Title 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 DVD/DVD-R/DVD-RW T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 4 T rack 5 CD Handling discs â When holding discs, do not touch their signal surfaces. Hold by the edges, or by one edge and the center hole. â Do not affix gummed labels or tape to the disc surface. Also, do not scratch or damage the label. â Discs rotate at high speeds inside the player . Do not use dam- aged, cracked or warped discs. â Do not play a disc with a special shape ö Do not play a disc having other shape than a circular disc, such as heart shaped disc. Otherwise malfunction may occur . â Storing discs ö Discs are made of the same kinds of plastic used for con- ventional analog audio records. Be careful not to allow discs to warp. Always store discs in their cases vertically , avoiding locations with high heat, humidity , or extremely low tem- peratures. A void leaving discs in cars; the interior of a car in direct sunlight can become extremely hot. ö Always read and abide by the precautionary notes listed on disc labels. â Cleaning discs ö Always keep your discs clean by wiping them gently with a soft cloth from the inner edge toward the outer edge. ö When cleaning discs, the use of a commercial CD/DVD clean- ing kit is recommended. ö If a disc becomes very dirty, dampen a soft cloth with water , (be sure to wring it out well) and wipe the away dirt gently . Remove any water drops with another soft, dry cloth. ö Do not use record cleaning sprays or anti-static agents on discs. Never clean discs with benzene, thinner , or other volatile sol- vents or damage to the disc surface may result.
12 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Operation panel 1. POWER OFF ( â )/ON (_ ) switch Located on the rear panel. 2. Loop in/realtime cue/loop in point adjust button/indica- tor (IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST) Real time cue â P .40 Loop-in point input â P .44 Loop-in point adjust â P .44 3. Loop out/loop out point adjust button/indicator (OUT/OUT ADJUST) Loop-out point input â P .44 Loop-out point adjust â P .44 4. BACK & FORTH button â P .45 Use to switch between normal loop mode and back & forth loop mode. 5. Loop mode indicator â P .45 Lights during back & forth loop mode. 6. RELOOP/EXIT button/indicator â P .44 REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEA T ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLA Y DELETE MEMORY MENU T .MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/ST ART JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLA Y/PA USE D VJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV 12 3 56 7 8 13 12 11 46 47 48 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 37 38 39 40 41 42 31 43 24 14 53 52 51 50 54 9 4 49 10 17 20 16 19 15 18 23 22 21 45 44 55 56 36 35 34 33 7. 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button â P .45 ⢠4-Beat Loop When this button is pressed, loop play will be- gin with that point as the loop-in point, and the loop-out automatically point set 4 beats later . ⢠One-T rack Loop When this button is held depressed for 1 sec- ond or more, the chapter loop or track loop play will begin. 8. CUE/LOOP CALL button â P .48 Press to turn cue point navigation mode ON/ OFF . 9. Cursor button ( / / / ) This button is used for cue point navigation; during MP3 playback, functions for performing selections with MP3 navigator , and for making various DVD settings. 10. ENTER button This button is used for cue point navigation; during MP3 playback, functions for performing selections with MP3 navigator , and for making various DVD settings. 11. NORMAL/DJ switch â P .18 Located on the rear panel. 12. STOP button Stops disc playback. When the eject/stop mode select switch is set to LOCK, playback will not stop unless the P AUSE mode is set first. 13. Eject/stop mode select switch (UNLOCK/LOCK) UNLOCK: If the EJECT ( 0 ) button is pressed during playback, the disc stops and is ejected. If the STOP button is pressed during playback, the disc playback stops. LOCK: If the EJECT ( 0 ) button is pressed dur - ing playback, the disc will not be ejected. T o eject the disc, set the unit to pause, then press the EJECT ( 0 ) button. Likewise, playback will not stop if the STOP button is pressed during playback; to stop disc playback, set the unit to pause, then press the STOP button. 14. EJECT ( 0 ) button When this button is pressed, disc rotation stops and the disc is ejected from the loading slot. If Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to NORMAL. Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to DJ. the eject/stop mode select switch is set to the LOCK position, the disc will not be ejected unless the unit is set to pause before press- ing the EJECT ( 0) button ( â P .35). 15. TOUCH/BRAKE response dial Adjusts the disc deceleration speed (time to playback stop) when the jog dialâ s top surface is touched with jog mode set to VINYL ON. Rotate the dial counterclockwise to stop playback quickly , and rotate dial clockwise to cause slower deceleration. 16. RELEASE/ST AR T response dial Adjusts the disc acceleration speed (playback startup time) when the jog dialâ s top surface is released with jog mode set to VINYL ON. Rotate the dial counterclockwise to restart playback quickly , and ro- tate dial clockwise to cause slower acceleration. 17. JOG ADJUST dial Use to adjust the felt resistance (light/heavy) of the jog dial when it is rotated. 18. HYPERJOG MODE button/indicator When hyper jog mode is set to ON with jog mode set to VINYL ON, turning the jog dial causes the rate of change of image and sound to increase to 4x the rate of changed normally produced (when the hyper jog mode is OFF). Names and Functions of Parts
13 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) 19. JOG MODE select button Each time pressed, sets VINYL mode alternately ON/OFF . VINYL mode ON : If surface of jog dial is touched during playback, playback stops, and if the dial is then rotated, image and sound are output in response to the amount of rotation. (if the angled surface of the jog dial is rotated without touching the top, pitch bend opera- tion is enabled.) ö The current jog mode is memorized even when power is turned off. VINYL mode OFF: The above operations are disabled even when the jog dial â s surface is touched. 20. VINYL mode indicator Lights when the jog mode is set to VINYL mode. 21. TEMPO control range select button Each time this button is pressed, the TEMPO control slider â s vari- able range changes (ñ6 %, ñ10 %, ñ16 %, WIDE). When WIDE is selected, the variable range during DVD and MP3 play- back is set to 70 % to âÂÂ100 %, and during CD playback, ñ100 %. 22. TEMPO control range indicator (ñ6, ñ10, ñ16, WIDE) ö When control range is set to ñ6 %, the ñ6 indicator lights. ö When control range is set to ñ10 %, the ñ6 and ñ10 indicators light. ö When control range is set to ñ16 %, the ñ6 , ñ10 and ñ16 indica- tors light. ö When control range is set to WIDE, the ñ6 , ñ10 , ñ16 and WIDE indicators light. 23. MASTER TEMPO button/indicator â P .41 Each time this button is pressed, the master tempo function turns alternately ON/OFF . 24. TEMPO control slider When pulled forward ( ), playback tempo is accelerated, and when pushed away ( âÂÂ), tempo is slowed. 25. TEMPO RESET indicator When lighted, indicates that the playback tempo is set to normal tempo â 0â , regardless of the position of the TEMPO control slider . 26. TEMPO RESET button Pressing this button instantly resets the playback tempo to â 0â (nor - mal tempo), regardless of the current position of the TEMPO control slider . Press the button once again to cancel the reset. 27. Jog dial display â P .15 28. Jog dial ( FWD/ â REV) â P .41 29. Disc loading slot â P .35 30. Forced eject hole â P .35 31. Memor y card door and slot â P .47 32. Memor y card indicator â P .47 This indicator lights with a memory card is loaded and the door is closed, and flashes during memory card access. ö Do not open the door or turn off power while the indicator is flash- ing. 33. PLA Y/P AUSE indicator Lights during playback, and flashes during pause mode. 34. PLA Y/P AUSE ( 3 /8) button â P .37 35. CUE indicator â P .40 Lights to indicate a cue point has been set. Flashes during pause mode. 36. CUE button â P .40 Cue point setting Back cue Cue point sampler 37. Manual search buttons (REV 1 /FWDá ) â P .38 38. T rack search buttons (PREVIOUS 4/NEXT â) â P .39 Use to return/advance playback by track (during CD, MP3) or chapter (during DVD). During DVD playback, use to return to menu page or change page. 39. REV indicator Lights when DIRECTION FWD/REV select switch is set to reverse. 40. DIRECTION FWD/REV select switch Set to REV position for reverse playback. 41. HOT CUE REC MODE button â P .43 Press to select the HOT CUE button â s function (record/call). ö Defaults to call mode when power is switched on. 42. HOT CUE (A, B, C) buttons/indicators â P .43 A, B, or C indicator lights red to indicate hot cue point record mode. A, B, or C indicator lights green for hot cue point, and orange for hot loop point; when an indicator is lighted, call mode is enabled for that point; pressing the button initiates playback from the hot cue point. When indicator is not lighted, no hot cue point is recorded. 43. T itle/folder search buttons (DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ ) â P .39 During DVD playback, titles are forwarded or reversed in the direc- tion corresponding to the button pressed. During MP3 playback, goes in designated direction for folders in lay- ered CD or DVD. 44. TEXT MODE select button â P .42 Each time this button is pressed, the display alternates between W A VE and TEXT (track name/album name/artist name). 45. TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button TIME MODE: Each time the button is pressed, the time display switches alter - nately between playback elapsed time and remaining time (REMAIN). In the case of MP3, the remaining playtime (REMAIN) may not im- mediately be displayed, depending on the file. ö The time mode remains set in memory even when power is turned off. AUTO CUE: Hold depressed for one second or more to set/release the auto cue function. Hold depressed for five seconds or more to switch the auto cue level ( â P .37). ö The auto cue ON/OFF setting and auto cue level remains set in memory even when power is turned off. 46. ANGLE button Press to change the viewing angle during DVD playback (on sup- ported discs only). ö In DJ mode, when the angle is changed both video and audio playback temporarily stop (due to writing to buffer memory). 47. SUBTITLE button During DVD playback, press to alternately turn subtitle display ON/ OFF (on supported discs only). ö This function is disabled in DJ mode. 48. AUDIO button During DVD playback, press this button to change language or audio channel (on supported discs only). ö In DJ mode, when the language/audio channel is changed, both video and audio playback temporarily stop (due to writing to buffer memory). 49. Display â P .14 ( 1 to 24 ) 50. DISPLA Y button â P .46 When pressed in DJ mode, turns the hot cue, cue point, and play- back time guide display ON/OFF on the monitor connected to the preview video output connector . When pressed in NORMAL mode, turns the disc information guide display ON/OFF . ö When power is switched ON, the display function defaults to ON when the unit is in the DJ mode, and OFF (no display) in the NOR- MAL mode. 51. DELETE button â P .50 Press to delete cue points and loop points recorded in memory card. 52. MEMORY button â P .47 Press to store cue points or loop points in memory card. 53. MENU button Press to display DVD menu. Also, during MP3 playback, displays MP3 navigator screen. ( â P .46) 54. T op menu (T .MENU) button Press to display a DVD â s top menu level. 55. SETUP button â P .21 Press to display the setup menu. 56. RETURN button When setup or other menus are displayed, press this button to re- turn to the previous menu or item.
14 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) 12 3 24 17 45 6 7 8 14 12 13 9 10 11 16 15 19 23 18 20 21 22 Display 1. T itle/Folder number display (TITLE/FLD 00 to 99) Indicates the DVD title number . During MP3 playback, displays folder number . Not displayed during CD playback. 2. Chapter number (CHP 000 to 999) Indicates the DVD chapter number . During CD/MP3 playback, â CHPâ does not appear . 3. T rack number (TRACK 00 to 99/000 to 999 (MP3)) Indicates CD or MP3 track number . â TRACKâ is not displayed during DVD playback. 4. T otal track number (ALL) When playing DVD, displays the total number of chapters within the title. When playing an audio CD, displays the total number of tracks on the disc. When playing MP3, displays the total number of tracks within the folder . 5. Auto cue (A.CUE) indicator Lights when auto cue is ON. Does not light during NORMAL mode. 6. Remaining time (REMAIN) indicator Indicates that the current numerical display is of a track â s remaining time. 7. Minutes display (000 to 999 M) 8. Seconds display (00 to 59 S) 9. Frame display (00 to 74 F) Display audio frame numbers. 75 frames are equivalent to one sec- ond of normal play . Not displayed in NORMAL mode. 10. Video frame display (00 to 29 VIDEO F) Lights during DVD playback in DJ mode. 30 frames are equivalent to one second. Video frame display does not appear during CD play- back and in NORMAL mode. Since this unit controls video frames (1/30 second) based on the audio frame (1/75 second), combining the two will result in a maxi- mum deviation of 1. 11. TEMPO indicator Displays tempo variation produced when TEMPO control slider is operated. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 12. T empo control range display (ñ6, ñ10, ñ16, WIDE) Lights to indicate the TEMPO control slider â s variable range as se- lected with the tempo control range select button. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 13. BPM counter display Lights to indicate the beats per minute (BPM) of the currently play- ing track. Some tracks may not be measurable with the automatic BPM counter . Does not light in NORMAL mode. 14. Master tempo indicator (MT) Lights when master tempo function is ON. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 15. Dot matrix display (100x7 dots) Used for displaying various items, including TEXT , W A VE, guide, etc. During CD TEXT display , shows up to 72 characters for disc title or up to 48 characters for track title; for MP3, displays up to 48 charac- ters (display scrolls when 15 or more characters are to be shown). In the case of W A VE display , the varying volume levels of the cur - rently playing track are displayed, with the track sized to fit into the entire 100-dot display width. For guide messages, see P .54 â Dot Matrix Guide Display Mes- sages â . 16. Play address display Displays a bar graph to allow an immediate visual grasp of the elapsed and remaining playing time of the currently playing track. The full scale bar length indicates the full track length. ö The bar graph is off at the beginning of the track, and lights from left to right. ö The bar graph is lighted at the beginning of the track, and goes out from left to right. ö When the remaining playing time falls below 30 seconds, the bar graph flashes slowly; when less than 15 seconds are left, the bar graph flashes quickly . 17. Prohibited indicator ( ) Some DVD discs or players do not support certain functions or op- erations; if an effort is made to perform such operations, this indica- tor appears for about 2 seconds. 18. CUE point indicator When a point is recorded in the CUE button or IN/REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST button for the currently selected track, the â CUEâ indi- cator lights and the point â s relative starting position is shown in the display (2 lighted dots). Does not light in NORMAL mode. 19. MEMORY display If the currently selected track includes cue memory or loop memory , the â MEMORYâ indicator lights and the MEMOR Y display indicates the relative starting position of the cue or loop. T wo dots are used to display 1 point, and even if multiple starting positions are included within a single point, only one point is displayed. Does not light in NORMAL mode. 20. SRS indicator ( ) Lights when T ruSurround function is selected. This function is disa- bled in DJ mode. 21. Dolby Digital indicator ( 2 D) Lights during playback when Dolby Digital audio has been selected. 22. DTS indicator Lights during playback when DTS audio has been selected. Not supported in DJ mode. 23. Video out indicators (VIDEO OUT/P AL/NTSC) When the video output TV system is set to AUTO, only the â VIDEO OUT â indicator lights. When NTSC has been selected, both the â VIDEO OUT â and â NTSC â indicators light. When P AL has been selected, both the â VIDEO OUT â and â PA L â indicators light. 24. Angle indicator ( ) During DVD playback, this mark appears to indicate a scene with variable angle.
15 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT POWER OFF ON AC IN S S 1 2 5 67 8 9 3 4 Rear panel 1. POWER OFF ( â )/ON (_ ) switch 2. NORMAL/DJ switch ( â P .18) If this switch position is changed during playback, playback will stop, and then resume playback from the disc â s begin- ning. DJ: For jog dial, tempo variation and other DJ operations. During DVD playback, subtitles and some other functions, operations, or playback points may not be supported. NORMAL: DJ functions are not supported. Pause mode is silent, not audible. During DVD playback, selected audio sig- nals are output from the digital output connectors. During CD playback, digital data containing subcodes are output (does not support CD graphics). 3. CONTROL connector Using the supplied accessory control cord, this connector can be connected to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately) to al- low control of this unit from the DJ mixer . This facilitates the use of functions such as fader start play and back cue. Alternately , linking this connector to another DJ player allows automatic relay play ( â P .45). 4. AUDIO OUT L/R connectors RCA type analog audio output connectors. 5. Main video output connectors (VIDEO OUT) Includes RCA and BNC type connectors for outputting DVD playback video only (composite signals), as well as S-Video output connector . 6. DIGIT AL OUT connector RCA type coaxial digital output, for connecting A V amplifier , Dolby Digital/DTS decoder , CD recorder , etc. When NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â DJâÂÂ, during DVD play- back the unit outputs 2-channel linear PCM digital data, re- gardless of the selected audio signal format. During CD play- back, the unit outputs only audio data that do not include subcodes. When NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâ , during DVD playback the unit outputs digital data in the audio signal for - mat selected. During CD playback, the unit outputs digital data including subcodes. 7. Preview video output connectors (PREVIEW OUT) RCA type connector (composite signals) and S-Video output connector . These connectors output monitor images used to aid the DJ during operation. Outputs various guide messages and displays ( â P .16). 8. SYNC IN connector BNC type input connector for inputting external sync signal. Use to connect optional dedicated sync signal generator . 9. AC inlet (AC IN) Use auxiliary power cord to connect to standard electrical outlet. Jog dial display 1. Operation display Displays play position, with one revolution equivalent to 135 frames. The display rotates during playback, and stops during pause. 2. Cue point position display Displays the position of cue points. 3. Audio/video memory status display Flashes during writing to the audio/video memory . While indicator is flashing, it may not be possible to record real time cue points or hot cue points. 4. Jog touch detector indicator When VINYL mode is set to ON, this indicator lights when the top panel of the jog dial is touched. 5. VINYL mode indicator (Vinyl) Lights when VINYL mode is set to ON. 1 2 3 4 5
16 Before Operating (Names and Functions of Parts) Play REV 1 âÂÂ010 3. 45. 67/ 4. 56 CUE C B A VIDEO OUT PREVIEW OUT Guide display area Angle indicator Title number , chapter number Area for onscreen display of thumbnail images of points recorded in HOT CUE and CUE buttons. In reverse mode displays â REVâ indicator â Prohibitedâ mark and other indicators T otal time in chapter (min- utes / seconds) Chapter contents are displayed as minutes, seconds, and frames. When time mode is set to REMAIN, dis- played numbers are preceded with a â minusâ (âÂÂ) sym- bol, for example, âÂÂâ 1.10.08â . Status indicator Play: Normal playback Loop: Loop playback Cue: Cue standby Pause: Normal pause (standby) Scratch: Scratch operation Search: Chapter/track search á : Forward search (scan) 1 : Reverse search (scan) Reading: Recall hot cue, or cue point Main video output (VIDEO OUT) and preview video output (PREVIEW OUT) â The example shown here is an illustration meant to depict the general display contents, and may differ somewhat from actual mon itor appearance. This unit is equipped with both main video output ( VIDEO OUT) and preview video output ( PREVIEW OUT) connectors. In NORMAL mode, both VIDEO OUT and PREVIEW OUT produce the same video signals. In DJ mode, the outputs of the two connectors are different, as indicated below . Even in DJ mode, however , if a non-supported D J operation is attempted, the outputs will be the same as in NORMAL mode. â VIDEO OUT This outputs only the DVD playback image; it should be connected to the main publicly viewed monitor . â PREVIEW OUT This outputs the images used by the DJ when operating the unit, and includes various additional guide messages and menus. W A VE Display: Displays relative music levels of entire track spread over full scale length. Playing address display: The current relative point in track playback is displayed as a bar graph, with entire track length spread over full scale length, thus allowing immedi- ate visual grasp of the current playback position in the track. PREVIEW OUT (for MP3) PREVIEW OUT (for CD)
17 Before Operating (Connections) Before Operating (Connections) SIGNAL GND DIGITAL CD DIGITAL CD PHONO CONTROL CD L R LINE CONTROL CD L R DIGIT AL IN DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S S S B DJM-800 A DVJ-1000 DVJ-1000 Connections Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet. 1. Connections to a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately) (audio output and control connector) Using the accessory audio cable, connect the white plug to the L (left) connector , and connect the red plug to the R (right) co nnector . By connecting the accessory control cord, the player can be controlled from the mixer , allowing fader start play and back cue o perations. Note that digital connections can be made only with mixers equipped with digital input connectors (models DJM-800, DJM-1000, et c.). Use a commercially available coaxial digital cable to connect this unitâ s DIGIT AL OUT connector to the DJ mixerâ s DIGIT AL IN co nnec- tor . Connection example DJM-800: Accessory audio cable Accessory control cord ö When making connections to the DJM-1000, the furnished audio cables can be used to connect one set of the CD/LINE connectors to player A, and the other set of CD/LINE connectors to a second player B. When making digital audio connections, a commerciall y available coaxial digital signal cable must be used to connect this unitâ s DIGIT AL OUT connector to one of the DIGIT AL IN conne c- tors (3 to 6) of the DJM-1000 mixer . ö When connecting to the DJM-600, DJM-500, or DJM-300, use the furnished audio cables to connect the CD1 connectors to player A, and CD2 connectors to player B. ö When connecting to DJM-909, DJM-707 or DJM-400 use the furnished audio cables to connect the CH-1 CD connectors to player A, and CH-2 CD connectors to player B. ö When connecting to DJM-3000, connect player A to CH-1 LINE 1, and player B to CH-2 LINE 3. ö When connecting this unit to other audio mixers, connect the unit â s AUDIO OUT connectors to the mixerâ s LINE IN or AUX IN connectors. ( â DO NOT connect to the PHONO connectors, since it may result in distorted sound or improper playback.) Coaxial digital cable (sold separately)
18 Before Operating (Connections) 3. Connection to stereo amplifier (without DJ mixer) 4. Connection to component equipped with digital input connector â Setting the NORMAL/DJ switch (rear panel) When the unit is used normally as a DJ DVD player , the mode select switch should be set to the â DJâ position. If the switch position is changed during playback, playback will stop and after the stop, playback will begin from the beginning of the disc. When set to DJ (DJ mode): ö During DVD playback, the digital output connectors produce 2-channel linear PCM digital data, regardless of the selected audio signal format. In addition, subtitles and certain other functions and operations are not supported. ö During CD playback, the digital connector outputs only audio data without sub-codes. However , sampling frequency is fixed at 44 .1 kHz. As a result, limitations of recording or other functions may be experienced when certain CD recorders or other components are connected. For details, consult the Operating Instructions for the component to be connected. ö Some functions may be limited or disabled during DVD playback ( â P .7, â About DVD playback in DJ mode â ). When set to NORMAL (NORMAL mode): ö The digital connector outputs digital data including sub-codes, but the player â s DJ functions are disabled. ö When unsupported operations are attempted the message â NORMALâ will appear in the display . ö When power is turned ON, if the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL â , the display shows the message âÂÂNORMAL â . ö If you wish to use all ordinary functions during DVD playback, set the unit to NORMAL mode ( â P .7, â About DVD playback in DJ mode â ). Connect CD or AUX input connector (do not connect to PHONO input connector) Accessory audio cable Stereo amplifier CD recorder or amplifier with digital input connector , etc. Coaxial digital cable (sold separately) 2. Control cord connection for relay play By using the accessory control cord to connect two DJ players, automatic relay play can be performed between the two units. ( â P .45) DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT POWER OFF ON AC IN DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT POWER OFF ON AC IN S S S S DVJ-1000 DVJ-1000 Accessory control cord DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S DVJ-1000 DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S DVJ-1000
19 Before Operating (Connections) Before Operating (Connections) DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT DVJ-1000 5. Connection to television monitor (composite video/S-V ideo) This player is equipped with two video output connectors: a main video output connector ( VIDEO OUT) which outputs only the DVD playback image, and a preview video output connector ( PREVIEW OUT) which produces a variety of data displays used by the DJ during a performance. ö Each of the television monitors is connected by using standard video cables (RCA plug) or S-Video cables. ö The main video output is also equipped with a BNC type output connector ( COMPOSITE ), allowing the use of a BNC connector cable if desired. * Only one video cable is provided as an accessory . S-Video cables and BNC connector cables are not provided. â Connect the playerâ s video output dir ectly to a television monitor , not to a video deck (if connected through a video deck, the copy guard function may prevent proper playback). Main monitor BNC connector cable S-Video cable S-Video cable Video cable Video cable Preview monitor Note: Most DJ functions (cue, loop, reloop, tempo adjust, hot cue, jog dial, reverse play) are not supported when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâÂÂ. In addition, the pause mode is silent, not audible.
20 Before Operating (Connections) 6. Connection to video mixer Use a standard video cable (RCA plug) or S-V ideo cable for these connections. 7. Connecting the power cord After all other connections are completed, connect one end of the accessory power cord to the rear -panel AC inlet, and connect the other end (power plug) to a wall outlet. DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT DIGITAL OUT SYNC IN COMPOSITE DJ NORMAL AUDIO OUT CONTROL VIDEO OUT R L PREVIEW OUT S S S S S DVJ-1000 B VIDEO INPUT 1 S S VIDEO INPUT 2 VIDEO OUTPUT DVJ-1000 A VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT Video cable Main monitor Video mixer Preview monitor Preview monitor S-Video cable S-Video cable S-Video cable S-Video cable S-Video cable Video cable Video cable Video cable Video cable
21 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Setup Initial setup is required before playing DVDs. TV system setting for video output This setting is used to switch the TV system used for video out- put. Confirm on the following table the TV system format in which each kind of disc will be output. Using the Setup Navigator The â Setup Navigatorâ uses a dialog format to make basic tel- evision and amplifier settings. The various settings are made au- tomatically as the user responds to displayed questions. The Setup Navigator function cannot be used during playback. When Setup Navigator is started, setup questions appear in the following order: Language (OSD Language) \ TV Connection (TV type) \ Amp Connection 1. Set POWER switch to ON. If a disc is already loaded, remove it. 2. Press SETUP button. The Setup Navigator screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Setup using the Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Auto Start Off SETUP ENTER Start: Select to begin the Setup Navigator . Auto Start Off: Select if Setup Navigator settings are already completed. ö When [ Auto Start Off] is selected, the next time the SETUP button is pressed the manual Setup Menu will appear . 3. Press ENTER button. The Setup Navigator is initiated. â During setup, to return to the previous menu screen: Press the cursor buttonâ s left side ( ). Select On-Screen-Display (OSD) Language Languages selectable include English, French, German, Italian, or Spanish. Press the cursor buttonâ s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the language desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Select the On Screen Language Setup Navigator OSD Language Language English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol SETUP ENTER English: OSD Language is English. Fran çais: OSD Language is French. Deutsch: OSD Language is German. Italiano: OSD Language is Italian. Espa ñol: OSD Language is Spanish. ö The language selected as the OSD Language is automatically selected as the language used in subtitles and audio. ( â P . 30) FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT DVJ-1000 ENTER OP MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAK RELEASE/ST A JOG ADJUST 1. Set the player â s POWER switch to OFF . 2. While depressing the DVD TITLE \ button, set the power to ON. 3. Release the DVD TITLE \ button once the TV system is shown in the display . Each time steps 1 to 3 are repeated, the setting alternates as follows: NTSC (factory default) = PA L P AL = AUTO AUTO = NTSC ö Note that visual quality may deteriorate if the discâ s record- ing method differs from the TV system selected for out- put. How to perform setup Setup operations are performed by first pressing the SETUP button to display the Setup Menu on the screen; the cursor but- ton is used to select items, and items are confirmed with the ENTER button. The cursor button contains four sensors ( / / / ) in a single button. Press the top ( ), bottom ( ), left ( ) and right ( ) sides of the button to move in the corresponding directions on the screen. Settings are performed via a â Setup Navigatorâ which uses a dialog format to make basic settings of television and amplifier; a â Setup Menu Modeâ is used for individual settings. First press the SETUP button to start the â Setup NavigatorâÂÂ. â Setup Menu Mode â includes â Basic â and â Expert âÂÂ; the latter mode allows more detailed settings. Player setting Disc type DVD (NTSC) DVD (P AL) CD or no disc AUTO mode NTSC PA L NTSC or P AL NTSC mode NTSC NTSC NTSC P AL mode PA L PA L PA L
22 Preparations (Setup) Select type of television connected Sets the type of television connected to the player . Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Widescreen TV 16:9 aspect ratio Setup Navigator TV T ype TV Connection Widescreen(16:9) Standard(4:3) Widescreen(16:9): Select this option when connecting a television with Widescreen (16:9) aspect ratio. Standard(4:3): Select this option when connecting a television with conven- tional (4:3) aspect ratio. Select the type of digital signal supported by your amplifier â Digital output during DJ mode is automatically converted to linear PCM only . Set the type of digital signal supported by the amplifier connected to the player . (Consult the Operating Instructions for your ampli- fier when making this setting.) Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Compatible with Dolby Digital Setup Navigator Digital Jack Amp Connection Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/DTS Dolby Digital/MPEG Dolby D/DTS/MPEG PCM Not Connected SETUP ENTER Dolby Digital: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect a A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports the Dolby Digital format. Dolby Digital/DTS: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect an A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports Dolby Digital and DTS formats. Dolby Digital/MPEG: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect an A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports Dolby Digital and MPEG formats. Dolby D/DTS/MPEG: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect an A V amplifier to the player , and the amplifier supports Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG formats. PCM: Select this item if you have used a digital audio cable to connect a stereo or Dolby Pro Logic amplifier . Not Connected: Select this item if you have used the accessory analog audio cable to connected an amplifier , or if you do not know whether the amplifier supports digital signals. When this item is selected, the next setting [ 96kHz PCM Audio] is not required; skip it and go directly to [ Exit Setup Navigator ]. ö If your amplifier does not support DTS audio, do not select the [ Dolby Digital/DTS] or [ Dolby D/DTS/MPEG], since ad- ditional noise may occur . Select whether connected amplifier supports 96 kHz audio Set this item to reflect whether the connected amplifier sup- ports linear PCM 96 kHz audio. Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Digital jack not compatible with 96kHz Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Audio Amp Connection No Ye s Don't Know No: Connected amplifier does not support linear PCM 96 kHz audio. Y es: Connected amplifier does support linear PCM 96 kHz audio. Don â t Know: Select this item if you are unsure whether the connected ampli- fier supports linear PCM 96 kHz audio. ö If [ No ] or [Don â t Know ] is selected, DVD audio will be con- verted to 48 kHz for output, regardless of whether it is origi- nally linear PCM 96 kHz. Exit Setup Navigator Choices here include: to save the new settings and close Setup Navigator; to abandon (delete) the new settings and close Setup Navigator , or to start over without closing. Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to move the cursor to the item desired, then press ENTER button to confirm. SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Changes are saved Setup Navigator Exit Setup Navigator Save Changes Delete Changes Start Again Save Changes: The new settings will be saved and applied, and Setup Navigator will close. Delete Changes: New settings will be abandoned and Setup Navigator will close. Start Again: Setup Navigator will return to the [ OSD Language] and start settings again. ö If [ Save Changes] or [ Delete Changes] is chosen, the initial setup menu will close. ö If [ Start Again ] is selected, the display will return to the [ OSD Language ] menu screen.
23 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 V2 Video1 General A2 Language Audio1 Audio DRC Off On Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital PCM DTS Out Off DTS 96kHz PCM Out 96kHz 48kHz 96kHz MPEG Out MPEG MPEG PCM Digital Out On Off Background Pioneer Logo Black Video Adjust Start Still Picture Field Frame Auto On Screen Display On Off Angle Indicator On Off OSD Language English fran ç ais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñ ol Audio Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Auto Language On Off DVD Language w / Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Subtitle Display On Off Assist Subtitle Subtitle Off With Audio Selected Subtitle Setup Menu Mode Expert Basic Setup Navigator Start Parental Lock Password (Change) Level Country Code TV Screen 4 : 3(Letter Box) 4 : 3(Pan&Scan) 16 : 9(Wide) S-Video Out S1 S2 Screen Saver On Off Virtual Surround Off T ruSurround Legato PRO Off Standard Effect1 Effect2 Effect3 Hi-Bit On Off P .25 P .25 P .25 P .25 P .26 P .26 P .26 P .26 P .27 P .27 P .28 P .28 P .29 P .28 P .29 P .30 P .30 P .25 P .21 P .33 P .30 P .30 P .30 P .31 P .31 P .32 P .32 Setup Menu items Manual setup using the Setup Menu allows a greater variety of setup options than the Setup Navigator . Consult the pages Noted for more information about the contents of items and options listed on the menu. ö â indicates factory default values. ö settings are displayed in the Setup Menu â s [Expert] mode.
24 Preparations (Setup) T o return all settings to their factory defaults Use this command to return all changed settings to their factory default values. 1. T urn power OFF . 2. While holding the STOP button depressed, set the POWER switch to ON, and continue holding the STOP button until the âÂÂPOWER ON â indication goes off. ö All setting contents will be returned to their factory default values. The DJ mode functions listed below are set to the follow- ing factory defaults in addition to the items in the Setup Menu (P .23). Auto Cue: OFF Auto Cue level: â 60 dB Jog mode: VINYL ON T ime mode: REMAIN TV system setting for video output: NTSC â This command additionally erases all memory contents, in- cluding â video memor yâ ( â P .28). Be sure you wish to delete all memory contents before using this command. Using the Setup Menu â Setup menu functions are disabled during DVD playback in DJ mode, and during CD playback. Set the unit to stop, or remove the disc before attempting setup operations. The Setup Menu is used when you wish to modify the default factory settings. The following instructions introduce the basic operations and controls used with the Setup Menu. ö If you have not yet performed the basic setup using the Setup Navigator , the Setup Navigator screen will appear first. Confirm that power is turned ON, then 1. Press the SETUP button. The Setup Menu will appear . [Example] V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 â â â â â Off Dolby Digital Off 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG 3 PCM Setup audio Digital output format/tone adjust SETUP 2. Press the left and right sides of the cursor button ( / ) to move between the tags at the top of the menu ([Audio1], [Audio2], [Video1], [V ideo2], [Language], or [General]). 3. Use the upper and lower sides of the cursor button ( / ) to select the desired setting item. 4. Press the cursor button â s right side ( ) to move to the options list. 5. Use the upper and lower sides of the cursor button ( / ) to move between options. 6. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to modify other settings. T ags Usable operation buttons 7. Press the SETUP button. The Setup Menu will close. ö If the Setup Menu is opened again after you have previously made settings there, the previously shown menu screen will appear . â Disc-dependent settings Some setting changes are not supported, depending on the kind of disc (DVD/CD) used. Whether a desired setting is supported can be confirmed by viewing the indicator color at the left of the selected setting item. Consult the accompanying table for infor - mation regarding what settings are supported for each disc type. Changed settings become effective immediately . â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Setup disc's subtitle language SETUP Indicator Color Disc T ype Blue, Y ellow DVD only Green All â Items not changeable during playback Items that cannot be set during playback are displayed in grey . Perform this operation in the stop mode, or when no disc is loaded. Indicator â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English English English On Grey
25 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Advanced settings The Setup Menu includes two mode levels, [ Basic] and [ Expert ]; the [ Expert] mode allows more advanced settings. â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Expert Basic Off (us) Change menu mode SETUP Exit Move Expert: Displays advanced settings. Basic: Displays basic settings; simple explanations ( ) are displayed for the items selected (factory default settings). Adjusting Dolby Digital audio â Digital output during DJ mode is automatically converted to linear PCM only . This item allows adjustment of the dynamic range of digital sound. By adjusting the audio DRC (dynamic range compression), large- volume sounds can be attenuated and low-volume sounds can be enhanced for a variety of playback effects. This setting is ef- fective, for example, when it is difficult to hear dialog on a televi- sion program, or when you do not wish to disturb neighbors while watching movies late at night. ö See P .24 for menu instructions. â â â 96kHz 3 48kHz â MPEG 3 PCM V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off On Off Dynamic playback at low volume SETUP Off: Cancels Audio DRC. Allows maximum audio presence when used with high-fidelity speakers (factory default setting). On: Suppresses loud sounds (explosions, etc.) making it easier to understand dialog. ö Audio DRC is supported only when using Dolby Digital audio. ö Some discs may produce less effect. ö Audio DRC is also applied to audio produced from the digital output (coaxial) connectors. In this case, set [ Dolby Digital Out ] to [ Dolby Digital 3 PCM ], and set [Digital Out ] to [On ]. ö The effect produced with Audio DRC differs depending on the speakers used and the volume setting of the A V amplifier . T urn the setting ON/OFF while adjusting your sound volume so as to produce most effective results. Digital output setting â Digital output during DJ mode is automatically converted to linear PCM only . This item allows selection of the kind of digital signals supported by the connected amplifier . ö If this item is set incorrectly , unwanted noise may be pro- duced. ö Consult the Operating Instructions for your amplifier when making this setting. ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Dolby Digital output Set to [ Dolby Digital 3 PCM] when the connected amplifier does not supports Dolby Digital audio. â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Dolby Digital 3 PCM 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG 3 PCM Change Dolby Digital output mode SETUP Dolby Digital: Setting for amplifier or decoders supporting Dolby Digital audio (factory default setting). Dolby Digital 3 PCM: Dolby Digital signals are converted to linear PCM for output. Se- lect this setting when the connected amplifier does not support Dolby Digital audio. DTS output Set this item to [ DTS] when the connected amplifier supports DTS. â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off DTS MPEG 3 PCM Change DTS output mode SETUP Off: Select this item when the connected amplifier does not support DTS (factory default setting). DTS: Select this item when the connected amplifier or decoder sup- ports DTS. 96kHz PCM output Set this option to [ 96kHz] when the connected amplifier sup- ports 96 kHz output. â â â â SETUP V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off 96kHz 3 48kHz 96kHz Change 96kHz output mode 96kHz 3 48kHz: 96 kHz signals are converted to 48 kHz for output. Select this option when the connected amplifier does not support 96 kHz signals (factory default setting). 96kHz: Select this option if the connected amplifier or decoder supports 96 kHz output.
26 Preparations (Setup) MPEG output Set this option to [ MPEG] if the connected amplifier supports MPEG audio. â â â â â SETUP V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off MPEG MPEG 3 PCM Change MPEG audio output mode MPEG: Select this option if the connected amplifier or decoder supports MPEG audio. MPEG 3 PCM: MPEG signals are converted to linear PCM for output. Select this option if the connected amplifier does not support MPEG (factory default setting). Digital output ON/OFF (Expert Mode) This setting allows disabling of outputs from the digital audio output connectors. â â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out 96kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Off 96kHz 3 48kHz MPEG 3 PCM On Off SETUP On: Signals are output from the rear panel digital output connectors (factory default setting). Off: Signals are not output from the rear panel digital output connec- tors. [Audio2] settings ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Surround setting â This option is not supported in DJ mode. This function is supported only when connected to the audio output connectors. Not supported during use of DTS audio, lin- ear PCM 96 kHz audio. â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato Off T ruSurround Surround effect from 2 speakers SETUP Off: Disabled (factory default setting) T ruSurround: Select for virtual surround sound. ö If [ T ruSurround ] is selected during playback of DVD Dolby Digital 2ch discs, the audio level produced from the digital output connectors will be reduced. Also note that if the [ Audio1] menu item [ Dolby Digital Out ] is set to [ Dolby Digital 3 PCM] when playing discs other than those recorded in Dolby Digital 2ch format, selecting [ T ruSurround ] will cause audio output to be disabled from the digital output connectors. ö Some discs may produce less surround effect than others. Legato PRO function Select from among the four ambience modes based on your own preferences and the style of music being played. The char - acteristics of the four modes are as follows: Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Off Standard Effect1 Effect2 Effect3 SETUP Wide Range Digital filter Y ou can select the quality of sound. Off: Legato function disabled (factory default setting). Standard: Produces full-bodied sound presence. Effect1: Produces bright, vivid sound. Effect2: Produces sound with depth and reserve. Effect3: Produces sound with solid bass and balance. ö The Legato PRO function operates to change the audio digital filter response of those bands primarily outside the audio range. ö The amount of tonal change may vary , depending on the lis- tening room environment. â Supports Dolby *1 Digital / DTS *2 for genuine theater -like sound impact By connecting an amplifier supporting Dolby Digital/DTS, you can enjoy the immediacy and power of 5.1 channel movies and music DVDs. â Equipped with SRS T ruSurround (Virtual Surround) Recreates the ambience of 5.1 channel sound using only 2 speakers. SRS T ruSurround *3 technology performs direct processing of 5.1 channel digital sound data. *1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. â Dolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. *2 â DTS â and â DTS Digital Out â are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Sys- tems, Inc. *3 T ruSurround, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. T ruSurround technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
27 Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Set the screen aspect ratio for the television Select the value matching the type of televi- sion connected. Select [ 16:9(Wide)] when a wide-screen television is connected. Most DVD movies are recorded to support wide television screens with an aspect of 16 hori- zontal to 9 vertical. As a result, when DVDs are viewed on conventional televisions, the image is projected at the television â s aspect ratio of 4:3, causing it to appear horizontally compressed. In order to eliminate this kind of distortion, set the aspect ratio either for [ 4:3 (Letter Box) ] or [ 4:3(Pan&Scan) ] when us- ing a conventional television. ö This setting cannot be changed during play- back. â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Component Video 4:3(Letter Box) 4:3(Pan&Scan) 16:9(Wide ) Select your display preference SETUP 4:3(Letter Box): Select this setting when using a conventional television and you wish to view movies in letterbox format. 4:3(Pan&Scan) : Select this setting when using a conventional television and you wish to view movies in â pan and scan â format. 16:9(Wide): Select this setting when using a widescreen (16:9) television (factory default setting) â The 4:3(Pan&Scan) format is not sup- ported in DJ mode. If [4:3(Pan&Scan)] is selected when the unit is in DJ mode, output will be in letterbox setting. ö Some DVDs do not support changing of aspect ratio. Consult the information printed on your disc â s jacket for more details. Hi-Bit function (Expert Mode) By converting 16-bit to 20-bit audio data to 24-bit, smooth, de- tailed sound quality is produced even at low listening levels. â â â SETUP Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Hi âÂÂBit Off Off On Off On: Hi-Bit function is enabled (factory default setting) Off: Hi-Bit function is disabled. ö In DJ mode, 24-bit processing is normally used, regardless of the setting selected. [V ideo1] settings â Aspect ratio formats [With conventional television set] DVD recording format Player Setting Viewing appearance 4:3(Letter Box) Black bands appear at top and bottom of screen; im- age is projected in correct aspect ratio. 4:3(Pan&Scan) Right/left sides of image are cut off, but image is projected in correct as- pect ratio. 16:9(Wide) Image is horizontally com- pressed (appears vertically stretched). If the image appears as shown here, set the playerâ s aspect ratio to [4:3 (LetterBox)] or [4:3 (Pan&Scan)]. All settings Appears with correct aspect ratio. 16:9 disc 4:3 disc DVD recording format Player Setting Viewing appearance [With widescreen television set] 16:9 disc 4:3 disc 16:9(Wide) 16:9(Wide) Appears with correct aspect ratio. Black bands may appear at top/bottom with some discs. Black bands appear at right/left, but image is projected in correct as- pect ratio. Image is vertically compressed (appears horizontally stretched) If the image appears as shown here, set the television setâ s aspect ratio âÂÂnormalâÂÂ. For details consult the Operating Instructions for your television set.
28 Preparations (Setup) Select S-Video output (Expert Mode) Set this option to select the video signal output from the S-V ideo connector . ö When the S-Video connector is used to connect the player to a television set, the image may appear vertically compressed (or stretched horizontally). In this case, select [ S1]. â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen S-Video Out Screen Saver 16:9(Wide) S1 S2 SETUP S2: The S2 video signal is output (factory default setting). S1: The S1 video signal is output. S1 Video Output: S1 is S-Video with added signal for discrimination of aspect ratio (4:3, 16:9). S2 Video Output: S2 is the S1 signal with the addition of another signal for dis- crimination of the picture viewing format (letter box, pan and scan). When played on a wide television supporting S2, the appropriate picture mode will be selected automatically . Screen Saver setting (Expert mode) The screen saver function is provided in order to prevent image burn (residual image) on a television screen when a single image is paused or otherwise remains on the screen for an extended period of time. ö When enabled, the screen saver function operates after an image has been displayed for about five minutes. â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen S-Video Out Screen Saver 16:9(Wide) S2 On Off SETUP On: Screen saver function is enabled (factory default setting). Off: Screen saver function is disabled. â In DJ mode, the screen saver function does not operate when the unit is in pause mode. Video quality adjust The video quality can be set to provide optimum reproduction of specific types of image (movies, animation, etc.). Further , each of the video image quality options can be set individually , and each setting can be recorded in memory . If playback is performed while displaying the initial setup menu, the picture quality can be adjusted while viewing the actual television image. T o select a preset picture quality 1. Using the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ), select [Video2] \ [Video Adjust] \ [Start]. â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Pioneer Logo Start Picture Quality Controls SETUP 2. Press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will appear . Video Memory Select Video Setup 3. Select [Video Memory Select] and press the ENTER button. Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Cinema Animation Standard 4. Use the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ) to select the desired preset picture quality . Standard: Reproduces the picture quality recorded on the disc as is. Cinema: Optimum for watching in a darkened room, to recreate the atmosphere of a movie theater . Animation: Produces bright, crisp colors, optimum for watching video ani- mation. Memory1/Memory2/Memory3: Favorite picture quality settings can be recorded in memory , as described in the following section, â Adjusting picture quality â . 5. Press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will close.
29 INDEX Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Adjusting picture quality 1. Use the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ) to select [V ideo2] \ [Video Adjust] \ [Start], then press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will appear . 2. Use the cursor buttonâ s up/down sides ( / ) to select [Video Setup] and press the ENTER button. Video Memory Select Video Setup 3. Use the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to select the item you wish to adjust. DISPLA Y ENTER Fine Focus On Off Move Select Check When the DISPLA Y button is pressed, a submenu list of the selected adjustment items will be displayed. Press the DIS- PLA Y button once again to return to the previous menu. Memory Fine Focus Contrast Sharpness Chroma Level Hue On Off soft fine min max min max green red Off 1 2 3 Fine Focus: Set to [ On ] to reproduce high-resolution images. Contrast: Use to adjust the ratio between the brightest and darkest parts of the image. Sharpness: Use to adjust the image brightness with respect to the middle frequency range. This function is disabled when [ Fine Focus] is set to [ On ]. Chroma Level: Use to adjust the depth of color . This function is particularly ef- fective when watching heavily colored animations. Hue: Use to adjust the red-green balance. 4. Use the cursor button â s left/right sides ( / ) to adjust the selected item â s level. When setting [ Fine Focus], select between [ On] or [ Off ]. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all desired setting items. If you wish to record the selected settings in memory , use the cursor buttonâ s up/down sides ( / ) to select [ Memory], then use the cursor buttonâ s left/right ( / ) sides to select [ 1 ], [ 2 ], or [ 3 ] to record the combination of settings in the cor - responding memory space. ⢠If a combination of settings has previously been memo- rized in the selected memory space, the previous settings will be overwritten (erased) by the new settings. DISPLA Y ENTER Memory Move Select Off 1 2 3 Check 6. Press the ENTER button. The Picture Quality Controls menu will close. ⢠The effect of picture quality control changes may not appear as distinct with some DVDs and on some television sets. [V ideo2] settings ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Select Background Select the kind of background that appears when disc is stopped. â SETUP Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Pioneer Logo Black Put Background Selections Pioneer Logo: The Pioneer Logo mark appears as background when disc is stopped (factory default setting). Black: Background appears black when disc is stopped. Still Picture selection (Expert Mode) Use to eliminate image shaking when viewing still images (DVD pause mode), and produce a clearer picture. ö Some discs may not appear clearer even when [ Field ] is se- lected. â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Field Frame Auto SETUP Field: Eliminates shaking during still images. Frame: Normal mode. Auto: Switches automatically between [ Field] and [ Frame ] (factory de- fault setting). ö Automatically defaults to [ Auto ] in DJ mode.
30 Preparations (Setup) T urn on-screen display ON/OFF (Expert Mode) Sets player â s onscreen display ON/OFF . â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Auto On Off SETUP On: On-screen display is enabled (factory default setting). Off: On-screen display is disabled. Angle mark display (Expert Mode) Use this option to turn the on-screen angle indicator mark ON/OFF . In DJ mode, the preview image output angle indicator mark is turned ON/OFF using the DISPLA Y button, regardless of the setting of this option. â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Auto On On Off SETUP On: The angle indicator mark appears on screen (factory default setting). Off: The angle indicator mark does not appear on screen. [Language] settings Some DVDs include multiple subtitle and audio languages, al- lowing the user to select different languages as desired. This setting item allows the selection of such language and subtitle alternatives. ö See P .24 for menu instructions. Set the OSD Language Select the language used for Setup Menu and other on-screen displays (OSD). â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol Select the On Screen Language SETUP English: OSD Language is English. Fran çais: OSD Language is French. Deutsch: OSD Language is German. Italiano: OSD Language is Italian. Espa ñol: OSD Language is Spanish. ö In the DJ mode, the guide display language for preview im- ages, etc., is always English, regardless of the setting of this item. Select the Audio Language Select the language heard in audio channels. This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Setup audio language SETUP English: Audio Language is English. French: Audio Language is French. German: Audio Language is German. Italian: Audio Language is Italian. Spanish: Audio Language is Spanish. Other: Select from among 136 languages. For information on this item, see the section â â When Select- ing [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language â . Select the Subtitle Language Select the language you wish subtitles to appear in. This setting cannot be changed during playback. â No subtitles are displayed in DJ mode. â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English French German Italian Spanish Other Setup disc's subtitle language SETUP English: Subtitle Language is English. French: Subtitle Language is French. German: Subtitle Language is German. Italian: Subtitle Language is Italian. Spanish: Subtitle Language is Spanish. Other: Select from among 136 languages. For information on this item, see the section â â When Select- ing [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language â . ö If an attempt is made to select an Audio Language or Subtitle Language not actually recorded on the disc, the disc â s original language of recording will be selected automatically .
31 INDEX Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) â When selecting [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language Make this selection while looking at the â Language Code List â on P .32. If a language is selected that is not actually recorded on the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be used for the menu display . 1. Select [Other] and press the ENTER button. The Language selection menu will appear . (Example): T o set the Audio Language List of Language Code (0~2) en: English Setup audio language Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select â / Audio Language 05 1 4 ENTER SETUP RETURN 2. Select [List of Language] or [Code] Some languages are not displayed on the Code page. For details, see the â Language Code List â . ö The numbers listed in parentheses ( ) beside [ Code ] in- dicate the range of numbers possible. Use one of the following methods: â Select language using [Code] Use the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to select the desired number for each digit; use the cursor but- ton â s left/right sides ( / ) to move between digits. â Select language using [List of Language] (Example): T o select French Press the rear side ( ) of the cursor button twice. 3. Press the ENTER button. Automatic language and subtitle setting This function selects either automatic audio and subtitle language selection, or manual selection via the Setup Menu are used. This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language English English English On Off Play dialog, etc. in original language Subtitle ON with foreign audio SETUP On: Enabled when [ Audio Language] and [ Subtitle Language] are the same, and when subtitle display is set to ON (factory default setting). Off: Automatic audio language setting is canceled; instead, the lan- guages set manually with [ Audio Language] and [ Subtitle Lan- guage ] are enabled. Set DVD menu language (Expert Mode) Many DVDs contain menus; this command allows selection of the menu display language, when available. ö This setting cannot be changed during playback. Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off w/ Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other SETUP w/Subtitle Language: The language selected in [ Subtitle Language] becomes the menu display language (factory default setting). English: Menu display Language is English. French: Menu display Language is French. German: Menu display Language is German. Italian: Menu display Language is Italian. Spanish: Menu display Language is Spanish. Other: Select from among 136 languages. For information on this item, see the section â â When Select- ing [Other] for Subtitle Language, Audio Language, or DVD Language â .
32 Preparations (Setup) Set Subtitle Display ON/OFF (Expert Mode) Select whether to turn subtitles ON, OFF , or to display assist subtitles. ö This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On On Off Assist Subtitle SETUP On: Subtitles are displayed normally (factory default setting). Off: Subtitles are not displayed. However , some DVDs have subti- tles that are displayed by default, regardless of this setting (see paragraph at right). Assist Subtitle: [ Assist Subtitle ] are subtitles that provide additional informa- tion about the current scene, for example descriptions of ambi- ent sounds for the hearing impaired. Select this option to display such assist subtitles. Note that assist subtitles are displayed only when they originally recorded on the DVD being played. Set language for forced subtitles (Expert Mode) On some DVDs, even when the [ Subtitle Display] is set to [ Off ], some subtitles may be displayed automatically . Use this com- mand to select the language used for such subtitles. ö This setting cannot be changed during playback. â â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On English With Audio Selected Subtitle SETUP With Audio: Display subtitles in the same language as the audio being played. Selected Subtitle: Display subtitles in the language selected with the [ Subtitle Lan- guage ] in the Setup Menu (factory default setting). Language Code List Japanese (ja) English (en) French (fr) German (de) Italian (it) Spanish (es) Chinese (zh) Dutch (nl) Portuguese (pt) Swedish (sv) Russian (ru) Korean (ko) Greek (el) Afar (aa) Abkhazian (ab) Afrikaans (af) Amharic (am) Arabic (ar) Assamese (as) Ay mara (ay) Azerbaijani (az) Bashkir (ba) Byelorussian (be) Bulgarian (bg) Bihari (bh) Bislama (bi) Bengali (bn) T ibetan (bo) Breton (br) Catalan (ca) Corsican (co) Czech (cs) We lsh (cy) Danish (da) Bhutani (dz) Esperanto (eo) Estonian (et) Basque (eu) Persian (fa) Finnish (fi) Fiji (fj) Faroese (fo) Frisian (fy) Irish (ga) Scots-Gaelic (gd) Galician (gl) Guarani (gn) 1001 0514 0618 0405 0920 0519 2608 1412 1620 1922 1821 1115 0512 0101 0102 0106 0113 0118 0119 0125 0126 0201 0205 0207 0208 0209 0214 0215 0218 0301 0315 0319 0325 0401 0426 0515 0520 0521 0601 0609 0610 0615 0625 0701 0704 0712 0714 Language Input-code Gujarati (gu) Hausa (ha) Hindi (hi) Croatian (hr) Hungarian (hu) Armenian (hy) Interlingua (ia ) Interlingue (ie) Inupiak (ik) Indonesian (in) Icelandic (is) Hebrew (iw) Yi ddish (ji) Javanese (jw) Georgian (ka) Kazakh (kk) Greenlandic (kl) Cambodian (km) Kannada (kn) Kashmiri (ks) Kurdish (ku) Kirghiz (ky) Latin (la ) Lingala (ln ) Laothian (lo) Lithuanian (lt) Latvian (lv) Malagasy (mg) Maori (mi) Macedonian (mk) Malayalam (ml) Mongolian (mn) Moldavian (mo) Marathi (mr) Malay (ms) Maltese (mt) Burmese (my) Nauru (na) Nepali (ne) Norwegian (no) Occitan (oc) Oromo (om) Oriya (or) Panjabi (pa) Polish (pl) Pashto, Pushto (ps) Quechua (qu) 0721 0801 0809 0818 0821 0825 0901 0905 0911 0914 0919 0923 1009 1023 1101 1111 1112 1113 1114 1119 1121 1125 1201 1214 1215 1220 1222 1307 1309 1311 1312 1314 1315 1318 1319 1320 1325 1401 1405 1415 1503 1513 1518 1601 1612 1619 1721 Language Input-code Rhaeto-Romance (rm) Kirundi (rn) Romanian (ro) Kinyarwanda (rw) Sanskrit (sa) Sindhi (sd) Sangho (sg) Serbo-Croatian (sh) Sinhalese (si) Slovak (sk) Slovenian (sl) Samoan (sm) Shona (sn) Somali (so) Albanian (sq) Serbian (sr) Siswati (ss) Sesotho (st) Sundanese (su) Swahili (sw) T amil (ta) T elugu (te) Ta jik (tg) Thai (th ) Ti grinya (ti) T urkmen (tk) Ta galog (tl) Setswana (tn) T onga (to) T urkish (tr) T songa (ts) T atar (tt) T wi (tw) Ukrainian (uk) Urdu (ur) Uzbek (uz) Vietnamese (vi) Vo lap ük (vo) Wolof (wo) Xhosa (xh) Y oruba (yo) Zulu (zu) 1813 1814 1815 1823 1901 1904 1907 1908 1909 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1923 2001 2005 2007 2008 2009 2011 2012 2014 2015 2018 2019 2020 2023 2111 2118 2126 2209 2215 2315 2408 2515 2621 Language Input-cod e
33 INDEX Preparations (Setup) Preparations (Setup) Setting Parental Lock Some DVDs containing violent or other mature material are pro- vided with a parental lock function allowing parents to limit the disc â s viewing (see the disc â s jacket or label for information). By setting the player â s lock level lower than that of the disc, you can limit what discs can be viewed on the player . For example, by setting the player â s level to 6, discs with level designation 7 or 8 cannot be viewed unless a previously recorded password is input. ö See P . 24 for menu instructions. Recording a password 1. Use the four sides of the cursor button ( / / / ) to navigate to the [General] \ [Parental Lock] \ [Password] A password must be recorded before the [ Level] and [ Coun- try Code ] can be selected. â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Basic Password Level Country Code Setup viewing restrictions SETUP 2. Press the ENTER button. The [ Register Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Register Code Number Enter 4âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 3. Enter a 4-digit numerical code as your new password. Press the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/ decrement numbers, and use the left/right ( / ) sides to move between digits. 4. Press the ENTER button. The following Setup Menu will be displayed. â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Basic Password Change Level Country Code Setup viewing restrictions SETUP Password Change: Select this item to change your password (code number). Level: Select this item to set the parental lock level. Country Code: Select this item to select the country code of discs. ö It is recommended that you make a memo of your password number and store in a safe place. ö If you forget your password, return the unit to its factory de- fault settings, and set the password again. ö Some discs allow parental lock to be applied at the scene level, in which case restricted scenes will be skipped during playback. For details, consult the Operation Instructions ac- companying your disc. Change the Parental Lock level 1. Select [Level] and press the ENTER button. The [ Confirm Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Level: Confirm Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 2. Input the previously recorded 4-digit password (code number). Input the four digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/ right ( / ) sides to move between digits. 3. Press the ENTER button. The parental lock level setting screen will appear . The factory default setting is [ Off ]. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select Parental Lock: Level Change Set Parental Lock Level SETUP ENTER RETURN 1 Level 234 6 7 8 5 Off 4. Press the cursor button â s left/right sides ( / ) to select the desired level, and press the ENTER button. The selected parental lock level will be set. â T o play back DVDs with parental lock restrictions When an attempt is made to play back a disc restricted with the parental lock function, a screen may appear asking you to input the password (code number). The disc cannot be played back if the code number is not input correctly . Input the code number as follows: 1 Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down ( / ) sides to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/right sides ( / ) to move between digits. 2 Press the ENTER button. T o change your password 1. Select the [Password Change] and press the ENTER button. The [ Confirm Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Confirm Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 2. Input the previously set code number . Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down ( / ) sides to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/right sides ( / ) to move between digits.
34 Preparations (Setup) 3. Press the ENTER button. The [ Change Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Change Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 4. Enter a new 4-digit password (code number). Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/ right sides ( / ) to move between digits. 5. Press the ENTER button. The password (code number) will be changed. T o change the country code Consult the accompanying Country Code List when making this setting. 1. Select [Country Code] and press the ENTER button. The [ Confirm Code Number ] screen will appear . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Country Code: Confirm Code Number Enter 4 âÂÂDigit Code SETUP RETURN 2. Input the previously recorded 4-digit password (code number). Input the 4-digits by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decrement numbers, and the left/ right sides ( / ) to move between digits. 3. Press the ENTER button. The Setup Country Code menu will appear . List of Codes Code (0~2) us Setup Country Code Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Country Code 21 1 9 SETUP RETURN ENTER 4. Select either [List of Codes] or [Code] The numbers listed in parentheses ( ) beside [ Code] indicate the range of numbers possible. â When using [Code] to select the country code: (Example) Selecting the code for U.S.A. Input the 4-digit code number (2, 1, 1, 9) by pressing the cursor button â s up/down sides ( / ) to increment/decre- ment numbers, and the left/right sides ( / ) to move be- tween digits. â When using [List of Codes] to select the country code: (Example) Selecting the code for U.S.A. Use the cursor button â s up/down side ( / ) to highlight [us]. 5. Press the ENTER button. ARGENTINA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA BELGIUM BRAZIL CANADA CHILE CHINA DENMARK FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY HONG KONG INDIA INDONESIA IT AL Y JAP AN KOREA, REPUBLIC OF MALA YSIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND NORW A Y P AKISTAN PHILIPPINES PORTUGAL RUSSIAN FEDERA TION SINGAPORE SP AIN SWEDEN SWITZERLAND T AIWAN THAILAND UNITED KINGDOM UNITED ST A TES OF AMERICA 0118 0121 0120 0205 0218 0301 0312 0314 0411 0609 0618 0405 0811 0914 0904 0920 1016 1118 1325 1324 1412 1426 1415 1611 1608 1620 1821 1907 0519 1905 0308 2023 2008 0702 2119 Country/area Input-code Country/area- code ar au at be br ca cl cn dk fi fr de hk in id it jp kr my mx nl nz no pk ph pt ru sg es se ch tw th gb us Country/Area Code List
35 Basic Operations (Loading and Removing Discs) Basic Operations (Loading and Removing Discs) Loading and Removing Discs Hold evenly when inserting Insert with label surface upwards 1. Set the rear panel POWER switch to ON. Do not attempt to forcibly insert a disc when the POWER switch is set to OFF , since the disc or player may be damaged. 2. Insert the disc into the loading slot. ö Hold the disc with label surface upwards and insert evenly into the front-panel disc loading slot. ö When using 8 cm compact discs, place the disc into an adapter first. ö Only one disc can be loaded at a time. Do not attempt to load two or more discs simultaneously , or to load a second disc when an- other disc is already loaded. ö When loading a disc, do not apply bending force on the disc, or attempt to force the disc into the mechanism. Also, when the load- ing mechanism begins to pull the disc into the player or to eject a disc, do not attempt to forcibly override the mechanismâ s move- ment, since the disc or player may be damaged. 3. When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to UNLOCK, press the EJECT ( 0) button to eject a loaded disc. If the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to LOCK, during play- back press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button to first stop the disc, then press the EJECT ( 0) button. If a cue point has been set, during playback press the CUE button to initi- ate back cue, then press the EJECT ( 0) button to eject the disc. ö When the button is pressed, disc rotation will stop and the disc will be ejected partway from the loading slot. Note: Do not attempt to press the disc back into the slot while the â EJECT â indicator is lighted. If the disc is pressed back in while the â EJECT â indicator is lighted, the loading mechanism may stop. In this case, press the EJECT ( 0 ) button again, and do not attempt to reload the disc until the â EJECTâ indicator has turned OFF . Precautions when playing 8 cm CD singles 1 When playing 8 cm CD singles, be sure to use an adapter de- signed for 8 cm CDs. Before loading the disc into the player , confirm that the disc is fastened correctly by the adapterâ s tabs. If an 8 cm disc is loaded by mistake without an adapter , immedi- ately press the EJECT ( 0 ) button and remove the disc. If the disc is not ejected the first time the EJECT ( 0) button is pressed, press the button again. 2 Use only 8 cm disc adapters that feature the ' logo mark (rec- ommended compatible adapters). When mounting the disc to an adapter , confirm that the disc is able to rotate freely , and is not bent or warped. Forced eject function In event of a player malfunction or if the EJECT ( 0 ) button does not respond to allow removal of a disc, the disc can be removed by inserting the accessory pin into the forced eject hole on the front of the player . When using the forced eject function, be sure to following the accompanying precautions. 1 T urn off the playerâ s power and wait for at least one minute. Attempting the forced eject function im- mediately after turning off the power may cause the following dangers: ö The disc may be ejected while still rotating, resulting in personal injury . ö The disc may be damaged due to the disc clampâ s rotating in an unstable condition. 2 Use only the provided accessory pin for this procedure (do not use other pointed objects). The forced eject pin is located on the bottom surface of the player . When the accessory pin is inserted fully into the forced eject hole, the disc will be ejected from the loading slot by about 5 mm to 10 mm. It can then be grasped with the fingers and removed. Forced eject hole Note: This player does not support playback of 8 cm DVDs. Do not attempt to use adapters meant for 8 cm CDs, since the adapter may come loose during rotation, causing damage to the disc or player .
36 Basic Operations Basic Operations Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to NORMAL. Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to DJ. Beginning playback The playback operation differs depending on the type of disc, the setting of the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch, and the setting of auto cue and other functions. When a CD is loaded When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâÂÂ, play- back will begin automatically from the first track, and when the final track ends, playback will stop. Special DJ functions are not supported in this mode. When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the â DJâÂÂ, if the auto cue function is OFF , playback will begin automatically from the first track, and when the final track ends, playback will stop and the unit will enter standby . When the auto cue function is set to ON, the player will auto- matically cue to the selected cue point and the cue indicator will light; the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. If the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is then pressed, the player will skip over the non-recorded portion of the indicated track and immedi- ately begin playback. When playback comes to the end of the current track, the next track will be cued. The cue indicator will light, and the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. When the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed, playback will begin from the next track. When playing a CD disc recorded with MP3 files, playback will begin automatically from the first track in the first folder on the disc; when the final track of the folder ends, playback will stop and the unit will enter standby . When a DVD is loaded When a commercial DVD title is loaded, the initial default cautionary warnings will be displayed first (these warning messages cannot be skipped). When the DVD is recorded with a menu and automatic play- back start has not been set, the menu will appear . The menu can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button or the T .MENU button. The menu allows the setting of audio and subtitle languages, and the selec- tion of special features on the disc. EXAMPLE: Main Menu 1. Highlight clips 2. Chapter list 3. Previews 4. Subtitle settings 5. Audio settings 6. Play Depending on the disc, the style, contents, and operation method used in the menu may be different. Basic operations are performed by using the cursor button â s four sides ( / / / ) to select options, and by pressing the ENTER button to confirm the selection. For de- tailed instructions on using a disc â s menu, consult the operating guide provided with the disc. â DJ operations cannot be per formed on the menu display . When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â NORMALâ and the disc has been set for automatic playback start (or the menu â s âÂÂPlay â item has been selected), playback will begin. Special DJ functions are not supported in this mode. When the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to â DJâ and auto cue function (see next item) is OFF , if the disc is set for automatic playback start (or or the menu â s âÂÂPlay â item has been selected), playback will begin. When the auto cue function is set to ON, the player will automati- cally cue to the selected cue point and the cue indicator will light; the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. If the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is then pressed, the player will skip over the non-recorded portion of the indicated chapter and immedi- ately begin playback. When playback comes to the end of the current track, the next track will be cued. The cue indicator will light, and the play/pause indicator will flash, indicating that the player is in standby mode. When the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed, the player will begin playback of the next chapter . ö Some of the above operations may not be supported, depending on the disc or the portion being played. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO MENU T.MENU IN ADJUST CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT DVJ-1000 FWD REV PLAY/P AUSE ENTER PREVIOUS NEXT UNLOCK/LOCK STOP TIME MODE/AUTO CUE PLA Y/ P AUSE î CUE AUDIO TOUCH/ BRAKE RELEASE /ST ART SUBTITLE JOG MODE EJECT DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER î /î ENTER T .MEMU MENU PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â NORMAL/DJ
37 Basic Operations Auto cue function â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. This function is used to skip non-recorded (silent) portions at the begin- ning of tracks and automatically set the cue point ( â P . 40) immediately before actual sound begins when loading a disc, performing track search (chapter search), and when the playback track (chapter) changes. If the track signal cannot be found within ten seconds, the track â s beginning will be set as the cue point. â Setting auto cue ON/OFF Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 1 second or more to alternate the auto cue function ON/OFF . The display â s auto cue indicator ( A.CUE) lights when the auto cue function is active. ö The auto cue function ON/OFF status is memorized even when the player â s power is turned off. ö The auto cue sensitivity level can be changed if desired. â Changing the auto cue sensitivity level 1. Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 5 seconds or more. ö The display will show the â A.CUE âÂÂ60dBâ indicator (factory de- fault setting). 2. Press the cursor buttonâ s left/right sides ( / ) to change the sensitivity level. ö Supported sensitivity levels include: â 36 dB, â 42 dB, â 48 dB, â 54 dB, â 60 dB, â 66 dB, â 72 dB, â 78 dB. ö Either press the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button or wait 15 sec- onds and the setting mode will be canceled and the newly se- lected level will be set. ö The newly set sensitivity level is memorized even when the play- er â s power is turned off. T o stop playback â When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to UNLOCK: Press the STOP button. â When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to LOCK: During playback, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button, or if a cue point has been set, during playback press the CUE button to initiate back cue, then press the STOP button. ö When the STOP button is pressed, the current stop location will be recorded (resume function). ö T o resume play from the previous stop position, press the PLA Y/ P AUSE ( 6 ) button. ö T o cancel the resume function, press the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ or PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â button. T o eject the disc 1. Press the EJECT ( 0) button when the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to UNLOCK. When the UNLOCK/LOCK switch is set to LOCK, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button during playback, or when a cue point has been set, press the CUE button (back cue) before pressing the EJECT ( 0) button to eject the disc. ö Playback will stop and the disc will be ejected. Resume function ö If the EJECT (0 ) button is accidentally pressed when the UNLOCK/ LOCK switch is in the UNLOCK position, immediately press the PLA Y/ P AUSE ( 6 ) button to restore the unit to the mode it was in immedi- ately prior to pressing the EJECT ( 0 ) button. However , video and audio output will be interrupted during this interval. ö Following disc eject, if the same disc is reinserted, the unit will return to the same status it was in before the disc was ejected (with excep- tion of loop). ö After ejecting a disc, if the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button or PREVIOUS 4/NEXT â button is pressed the resume function will be canceled. ö The resume function may not operate when playing DVDs in NOR- MAL mode. T o temporarily interrupt playback (pause mode) During playback, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button. ö The play/pause indicator and cue indicator will flash and play will be interrupted. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of playback pause; in this case pressing the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button will cause the prohibited mark to light, and the corresponding prohibited mark will appear on the monitor . ö If the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed when the player is in the pause (standby) mode, the play/pause indicator will light and play- back will begin. ö If the pause mode is allowed to continue for 100 minutes or more, the disc playback will automatically stop. In this case, press the PLA Y/ P AUSE ( 6) button to resume playback. [In DJ mode, with jog mode set to VINYL mode OFF] ö Placing the player in pause mode enables audible pause (the video image appears as a still image, but audio sound can be heard inter - mittently). If sound is not desired in this case, lower the audio mixer â s output level. [In DJ mode, with jog mode set to VINYL mode ON] ö Placing the player in pause mode enables silent pause (still image with no sound). ö The TOUCH/BRAKE response dial can be used to modify the disc â s deceleration speed (time until playback stops). ö The RELEASE/ST ART response dial can be used to modify the disc â s playback acceleration time (time until disc reaches full playback speed). [In NORMAL mode] ö Placing the player in pause mode enables silent pause (still image with no sound). T o change language/subtitle settings during playback (DVD only) â T o change language during playback: The language setting can be changed during playback when the DVD has been recorded with multiple language options. Press the AUDIO button. The currently selected audio (language) option will be displayed on the screen. Each time the button is pressed the language will alternate be- tween the available language options. ö If the language is changed when the player is in DJ mode, both video and audio playback will be temporarily interrupted (due to writing to buffer memory). ö Some discs do not allow the audio language option to be changed with the AUDIO button (pressing the button will cause the prohibited mark to light, and the corresponding prohibited mark will ap- pear on the screen). In this case, go to the disc â s main menu to switch the language option. ö When a disc is removed from the player , the language setting will revert to that selected on the Setup Menu. ö With some discs, changing the language will cause the image to pause momentarily . â Changing the subtitle option during playback â This option is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to DJ (subtitles are not displayed in DJ mode). The subtitle language can be changed when the DVD has been recorded with multiple subtitle language options. Press the SUBTITLE button. The currently selected subtitle option will be displayed on the screen. Each time the button is pressed, the subtitle language will alternate be- tween the available options; if OFF is selected, subtitles will not appear . ö Some discs do not allow the subtitle option to be changed with the SUBTITLE button (pressing the button will cause the prohibited mark to light, and the corresponding prohibited mark will appear on the screen). In this case, go to the disc â s main menu to switch the subtitle language. ö When a disc is removed from the player , the subtitle setting will re- vert to that selected on the Setup Menu.
38 Basic Operations Fast forward/fast reverse Press the REV 1 /FWD á button during playback or when in the pause mode. [During CD playback] Hold the FWD á button depressed to perform fast forward. Hold the REV 1 button depressed to perform fast reverse. [During DVD playback in DJ mode] Hold the FWD á button depressed to perform fast forward. Hold the REV 1 button depressed to perform fast reverse. Fast forward and reverse are performed only within a single disc title. [During DVD playback in NORMAL mode] Press the FWD á button to perform fast forward. Press the REV 1 button to perform fast reverse. Each time the button is pressed and released, the speed of fast for - ward/reverse changes (in three stages). Press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to return the player from search mode to normal playback mode. No sound is output during manual search. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of manual search. In this case, the pro- hibited mark will light, and the same prohibited mark will ap- pear on the monitor screen. ö When playing a DVD in DJ mode, the above functions may not be supported depending on the disc or on the part being played. ö In the case of MP3, fast forward and reverse can be performed only within the same folder . ö In the case of MP3, the speed of fast forward/fast reverse may be reduced, depending on the file. â Super -fast search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the REV 1 / FWD á buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding either button depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction you wish the search operation to occur , and the player will enter the super-fast search mode. ö The speed of the search operation varies in response to the speed at which the jog dial is turned. In the case of DVDs, search speed is limited to a single high-speed setting. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the manual search button is ignored. ö When the jog dial is released, the disc will enter the playback mode. ö If the manual search button is released, the super-fast search mode will be canceled. ö In the case of MP3, fast forward and reverse can be performed only within the same folder . ö In the case of MP3, the speed of fast forward/fast reverse may be reduced, depending on the file. Changing the viewing angle (DVD only) Alternate viewing angles can be selected during playback of DVDs re- corded with multiple angles. ö DVDs recorded with multiple angles display the mark on their jacket. During playback, when the mark is displayed, press the ANGLE button. Each time the button is pressed the angle view alternates between those available. û ö If the angle is changed when the player is in DJ mode, both video and audio playback will be temporarily interrupted (due to writing to buffer memory). ö Some discs may not allow changing of the viewing angle, even though they display the mark. ö While in NORMAL mode or the main unit â s display shows â DISABLE DJ MODE â message, the pause mode will be released if the angle is changed during playback pause. ö Some DVDs allow changing of the angle by means of the disc â s main menu as well. T o turn off the angle indicator While in NORMAL mode, go to the Setup Menu and set [ Angle Indica- tor ] to [Off ] ( â P .30). Regardless of the setting of the Setup Menu â s [ Angle Indicator], when in DJ mode, the mark will not appear in individual scenes during playback. When display mode is ON, the mark will be displayed within the guide area of the preview monitor , during the playback of points that allow the selection of alternate angles. \ | ë Jog dial REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 FWD REV PREVIOUS NEXT ANGLE PLA Y/P AUSE 6 DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER î /î REV î FWD î PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â NORMAL/DJ
39 Basic Operations T rack search (skip) Use the PREVIOUS 4 /NEXT â buttons. ö Each time the button is pressed, playback skips to the next chap- ter (DVD) or track (CD) in the direction indicated by the button pressed. T o return to the start of the currently playing track, press the PREVIOUS 4 button once. T o return to the beginning of the track preceding the currently playing track, press the PREVI- OUS 4 button twice. ö Hold the button depressed to perform continuous track search. If the button is held depressed for 2 seconds, the search speed will increase. ö If auto cue is enabled and the player is in cue standby mode at the beginning of a track, pressing the PREVIOUS 4 button will cause the player to search for the track previous to the current one, and enter cue standby at the beginning of that track. ö In the case of MP3, the search will skip to the first track found in the designated direction; also, the skip function is supported only within the same folder . [During CD playback] ö During playback of the disc â s first track (01), pressing the PREVI- OUS 4 button twice in succession will cause the player to search for the beginning of the last track. In the case of MP3, when reverse direction skip is performed down to the lowest numbered track, the next skip will take it to the last track in the same folder . ö During playback of the last track, pressing the NEXT â button once will cause the player to search for the disc â s first track (01). In the case of MP3, if you attempt to move beyond the last track, the skip will move to the lowest numbered track within the same folder . [During DVD playback in DJ mode] ö During playback of the disc â s first chapter (001), pressing the PRE- VIOUS 4 button twice in succession will cause the player to search for the beginning of the last chapter . ö During playback of the last chapter , pressing the NEXT â but- ton will cause the player to search for the disc â s first chapter (001). [During DVD playback in NORMAL mode] ö During playback of the last chapter , pressing the NEXT â but- ton will cause the player to search for the disc â s next title. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of chapter search. In this case, the pro- hibited mark will light, and the same prohibited mark will ap- pear on the monitor screen. ö When playing a DVD in DJ mode, the above functions may not be supported depending on the disc or on the part being played. â Super -fast track search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the PREVI- OUS 4/NEXT â buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding either button depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction you wish the search operation to occur , and the player will search for tracks in response to the amount of jog dial rotation. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â button is ignored. ö This mode is canceled when the PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â but- ton is released. T itle search (DVD only) Use the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons. ö Each time the button is pressed, the player will search for the next (or previous) title (or PGC on multi-PGC discs) in the direction indicated. ö If the button is held depressed, the player will enter continuous search mode. If the button is held depressed for 2 seconds, the search speed will accelerate. ö Some DVDs prohibit the use of title search. In this case, the prohib- ited mark will light, and the same prohibited mark will appear on the monitor screen. ö When playing a DVD in DJ mode, the above functions may not be supported depending on the disc or on the part being played. â Super -fast title search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the DVD TI- TLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding either of the buttons depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction you wish the search operation to occur , and the player will search for titles in response to the amount of jog dial rotation. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ but- ton is ignored. ö This mode is canceled when the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button is released. Folder search (MP3 only) Use this function when performing track search on CD or DVD with lay- ered folder structure. Use the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons. ö Each time the button is pressed, search advances in the next folder of the direction designated by the button pressed. In the root di- rectory , the folder number â 00â and folder name â ROOTâ are displayed. ö If the button is held depressed, continuous folder search will be performed. If the button is held depressed for two seconds or more, the speed of search will increase. ö If an attempt is made to move backwards from the lowest num- bered folder , the search will move to the last folder on the disc. ö If an attempt is made to move forwards from the highest num- bered (last) folder , the search will move to the first (lowest num- bered) folder on the disc. ö Folders not containing any playable tracks will be ignored, and the search will move to the next folder . â Super -fast folder search Rotate the jog dial while holding either one of the DVD TI- TLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ buttons depressed. â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö While holding one of the buttons depressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction corresponding to the desired direction of search; search of folder numbers will be quickly performed in the indicated direc- tion. ö The search direction corresponds to the direction of jog dial rotation (rotate clockwise for fast forward, counterclockwise for fast reverse). The direction indicated by the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button is ignored. ö This mode is canceled when the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | /\ button is released.
40 Basic Operations REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO ENTER OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV IN ADJUST REALTIME CUE IN CUE REV 1, FWD á PLA Y/P AUSE 6 TEMPO MASTER TEMPO TEMPO TEMPO RESET JOG ADJUST DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER î /î PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â TEXT MODE IN/ REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST CUE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial Setting cue points â This function is not suppor ted when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. When a cue point has been previously set, pressing the CUE button during playback will cause the player to move instantly to the cue point and enter the cue standby mode. ö Storing to memory may not be possible while the jog dial â s audio/ video memory status display is flashing. â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode OFF 1. During playback, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button near the point you wish to set as a cue point. The player will enter the pause mode. 2. Search for the precise cue point. ö Using frame numbers: The cue point position can be set in units of single frames (75 frames per second). Using the jog dial or the REV 1 /FWD á buttons, advance or reverse the frames to the desired point. One revolution of the jog dial is equivalent to 135 frames; each time the search button is pressed, the disc moves one frame in the direction corresponding to the button. ö Search for cue point using audible pause: Rotate the jog dial slowly and reverse the disc to the instant just prior to the point from which you wish to begin playback (the cue point will be set at the point immediately after the sound heard during audible pause). 3. When you have found the desired cue point using the frame number or audible pause, press the CUE button. ö When the cue indicator lights, the new cue point has been re- corded in memory . ö During DVD playback, a thumbnail of the cue point appears on the preview monitor screen. ö During CD or MP3 playback, the cue point's track number and time are displayed on the preview screen. ö When a new cue point is recorded in memory , the previously memorized cue point will be erased. [Modifying a cue point] 1. During playback, press the CUE button. ö Playback will return to the set cue point and enter cue standby . 2. Use the REV 1 /FWDá buttons to enter audible pause mode. 3. Find the new cue point by performing steps 2 and 3 of the above section â â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode OFF â . â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode ON 1. As playback nears the desired cue point, either press the top surface of the jog dial or press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to set the unit in pause mode. 2. While pressing the surface of the jog dial, listen to the playback sound as you rotate the dial, and return play- back to the point just before the spot you wish to use as the cue point. 3. When the sound is at the desired cue point, continue hold- ing the surface of the jog dial depressed, and press the CUE button. ö When the cue indicator lights, the new cue point has been re- corded in memory . ö When a new cue point is recorded in memory , the previously memorized cue point will be erased. [Modifying a cue point] 1. During playback, press the CUE button. ö Playback will return to the set cue point and enter cue standby . 2. Perform steps 2 and 3 of the previous section â â Setting a cue point with VINYL mode ON â . ö In the same way as for VINYL mode OFF , the REV 1 /FWD á buttons can also be used to modify a cue point. â Real time cue During forward playback, press the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button at the place you wish to set as cue point. ö This point will be recorded as the new cue point. â Confirm cue point (cue point sampler) After setting a cue point, depress the CUE button while the unit is in the cue standby mode. ö The audio and video from the cue point will be played back while the CUE button is held depressed, allowing you to confirm the point. â T o return to a cue point (back cue) During playback, press the CUE button. ö Playback will return to the previously set cue point, sound will be muted, and the monitor screen will display black background as the unit enters the cue standby mode. ö Press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to resume playback instantly from the cue point. ö When playing a DVD that prohibits title or other searches, playback will continue, and the prohibited mark will appear in the display; the similar mark will appear on the monitor screen. ö In the case of MP3, back cue is supported only within one and the same folder . Changing playback speed â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. Slide the TEMPO control slider forward or back. When the slider is moved forward ( ), playback speed will increase, and when moved back ( â ), playback speed will decrease. ö The rate of tempo change is displayed. ö It is also possible to change playback speed without affecting the pitch ( â P .41, â Setting master tempoâ ). â Selecting a tempo control range Press the TEMPO button. Each time the button is pressed, the TEMPO control slider â s variable control range alternates between the values ñ6 %, ñ10 %, ñ16 %, and WIDE. The range can be adjusted in increments of 0.02 % (for ñ6 %), 0.05 % (for ñ10 %), 0.05 % (for ñ16 %), and 0.5 % (for WIDE). ö The variable control range setting value is shown by the tempo control range indicator (ñ6, ñ10, ñ16, WIDE), as well as in the onscr een display . ö The variability in the WIDE range is: ñ100 % (CD) 70 % to âÂÂ100 % (DVD, MP3) â T empo Reset Press the TEMPO RESET button. The TEMPO RESET indicator lights and the tempo change rate is reset to â 0â (normal tempo), regardless of the position of the TEMPO control slider . ö If the TEMPO RESET button is pressed once again, tempo reset is canceled, and the tempo returns to the value set with the TEMPO control slider .
41 Basic Operations Setting master tempo â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. During playback, press the MASTER TEMPO button. The master tempo indicator lights and the â MTâ indicator appears on the display . In this way , the music pitch will not vary even if the TEMPO control slider is used to change the tempo (speed). ö Note that sound quality will deteriorate, however , due to digital processing of the audio signals. ö When power is first turned on, this function defaults to OFF . Jog dial functions â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. 1. Rotate during playback (pitch bend). When the jog dial is set to VINYL mode ON, take care to operate the jog dial by rotating its outer periphery (the inclined surface); touching the top panel will cause operation of a separate function. ö Playback is accelerated ( FWD ) or decelerated ( REV â ) in an amount corresponding to the degree of jog dial rotation. In the reverse play mode, the operating directions are reversed (accelerated when rotated in the REV â direction, and decelerated when rotated in the FWD direction). ö When the jog dial rotation is stopped, playback returns to its previ- ous speed. 2. Rotate during playback (scratch play). See the section â Scratch Play â in Advanced Operations (P . 43). 3. Rotate during pause (frame search). [When jog mode is in VINYL mode OFF] The player will enter the audible pause mode (the paused image is displayed). ö When the jog dial is rotated, the audible pause position changes in individual frame units, in the direction corresponding to the direc- tion of jog dial rotation. ö One full revolution of the jog dial is equivalent to 1.8 seconds (135 frames) of disc advance (or reversal). [When jog mode is in VINYL mode ON] The player will enter the silent pause mode (the paused image is displayed). ö When the jog dial is rotated, the disc is played back in the direction and at a speed proportional to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation, and the pause position changes in individual frame units. ö When the hand is removed from the surface of the jog dial and rotation stops, the unit enters the silent pause mode again with paused image displayed. ö One full revolution of the jog dial is equivalent to 1.8 seconds (135 frames) of disc advance (or reversal). 4. Rotate during playback or in pause mode (spin). See the section â Spin playâ in Advanced Operations (P . 43). 5. Rotate during playback, while depressing the REV 1 / FWD á buttons (super -fast search). While holding one of the REV 1 /FWD á buttons depressed, ro- tate the jog dial in the direction corresponding to the direction of de- sired search; the search will be performed at faster - than-normal speed. 6. Rotate while depressing PREVIOUS 4 /NEXTâ button (super -fast track search). While holding one of the PREVIOUS 4 / NEXT â buttons de- pressed, rotate the jog dial in the direction corresponding to the di- rection of desired search (track search or chapter search); the search will be performed at a faster -than-normal speed, proportionate to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. 7. Rotate while depressing the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER | / \ button. (Super -fast title search) (DVD) (Super -fast folder search) (MP3) While holding one of the DVD TITLE/MP3 FOLDER |/ \ buttons depressed, turn the jog dial in the direction you wish to perform the search. Super -fast title (or folder) search will be performed in the direc- tion the jog dial is turned, and in proportion to the speed of the jog dial â s rotation. Note: The top surface of the jog dial is equipped with a pressure-sensitive switch. Do not rest objects on the dial, or subject it to severe im- pact or pressure. Do not rest drinks or other open liquids on the player; if the liquid spills, it may enter the player â s parts, damaging the player . Jog sensitivity adjustment By rotating the JOG ADJUST dial, the sensation of resistance felt when rotating the jog dial can be adjusted. Rotate JOG ADJUST dial. ö When rotated clockwise, resistance increases. ö When rotated counterclockwise, resistance decreases. ö Adjust the setting within the scale â s gray zone to set the jog dial sen- sation equivalent to that of the CDJ-1000MK2. JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEA VY Gray zone About the W A VE display â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position (replaced by TEXT dis- play). The W A VE display shows the changes in a track â s bass beat (bass drum, etc.), thus allowing the DJ to understand where breaks and end points come in the track. When the TEXT MODE button is used to switch to W A VE display , the single chapter or track will be displayed over the full range (100 points) of the display . ö After a track change, some time is required before the entire track â s W A VE display can be shown. By prerecording desired tracks â WA VE patterns on a memory card, the next time the track is played its W A VE pattern can be displayed instantly . ö If a track â s low-frequency beat changes are too low in volume, the break points in the track may not be displayed properly . ö If a search or pause operation is performed during the time the wave- form is being read, the waveform will not be displayed properly . ö Read-ahead processing of the W A VE display is not possible during DVD or MP3 playback. ö When playing MP3, W A VE display may not be possible, depending on the track.
42 Basic Operations About the TEXT display When the TEXT MODE button is used to select TEXT display , the dis- play shows CD-TEXT , including the names of tracks, albums, and artists. During MP3 playback, the display shows ID3 tag track name (if no ID3 tag is recorded, the display shows the file name) /ID3 tag album name/ ID3 tag artist name. ö Each title display can include up to 48 characters; title displays of 15 or more characters will scroll. ö T ext may include alphanumerics and some symbols. ö If no text is available, the â NO TEXTâ message will be displayed. ö The text will not be displayed during DVD playback. When a track name is selected in TEXT display , the â â icon will be displayed followed by the track name (with MP3, the ID3 tag â s title name or file name will be displayed). Also, during MP3 play , the bit rate will be displayed following the track name. DVJ-1000 128 kbps When an album name is selected in TEXT display , the â â icon will be displayed followed by the album name. Pioneer When an artist name is selected in TEXT display , the â â icon will be displayed followed by the artist â s name. Pioneer PRO DJ When folder search is performed with MP3, the folder name is displayed during the search. Pioneer DJ Mixing different tracks (splicing) â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. (Example) T o splice the next track (B) to the currently playing track (A). ö Connect the first player A to DJ mixer CH-1, and second player B to CH-2. ö Raise trim, channel fader , and master volume to appropriate levels, and set player A for playback. 1. Set the DJ mixer â s CROSS F ADER lever to the left (CH-1) side. ö T rack A plays. 2. Load the desired disc on player B. 3. Use the PREVIOUS 4 /NEXTâ buttons on the player B to select the desired track B. 4. Monitor CH-2 on the DJ mixer . 5. Rotate the DJ mixer â s MONITOR LEVEL dial and listen to track B on headphones. ö The main speakers produce the sound of track A only . 6. Select the cue point for track B while listening on the head- phones. 1 With the player B in playback mode, press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button near the desired track B cue point. ö If the jog mode is set to VINYL mode OFF , the audible pause mode will be enabled; if the jog mode is VINYL mode ON, the silent pause mode will be enabled. 2 Rotate the player B jog dial to find the exact cue point (first beat) of track B. 3 Once track B â s cue point has been set, press the CUE button on player B. ö Sound will be muted and the cue point will be set. 7. In beat with the sound of track A from the speakers, press the player B â s PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6) button. ö The speakers will produce the sound of track A. ö The headphones will produce the sound of track B. 8. Move the second player B â s TEMPO control slider so that the tempo (BPM) of track A and B are aligned. Move the player B â s TEMPO contr ol slider so that the displayed BPM of track B matches the BPM value for track A. ö When the BPM numbers match, tempo adjustment is completed. 9. Press the player B â s CUE button. ö The player B will return to the previously set track B cue point. 10. While listening to the closing sounds of player A â s track A from the speakers, press the player B â s PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button. ö The player B begins playing track B. 11. While confirming the sound on the headphone, steadily move the DJ mixer â s cross fader lever toward the right side. ö The sounds of track B will gradually mix with and replace the sounds of track A heard from the speaker . ö When the DJ mixer â s cross fader lever has moved completely to the right side, the splicing has been completed. â Long mix play As long as the BPM rates match, track A and track B will mix well, even if the cross fader lever is in the middle position. â Fader start play Using the cross fader start function on a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold sepa- rately), the mixing operation can be simplified by eliminating step 10 (above). Also, when the cross fader lever is returned, the players return to the status of step 9 (above), so sound can be produced repeatedly . REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO ENTER OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV IN ADJUST REALTIME CUE IN CUE PLA Y/P AUSE 6 TEMPO PREVIOUS 4 NEXT â TEXT MODE CUE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial
43 Advanced Operations Advanced Operations REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV PLA Y/P AUSE 6 JOG MODE RELEASE / ST ART TOUCH / BRAKE C A B HOT CUE HOT CUE REC MODE IN/ REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST OUT/ OUT ADJUST HYPERJOG MODE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial Scratch play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. When the jog mode is set to VINYL mode ON, pressing the jog dialâ s top panel while rotating the dial will cause audio and video to be output in proportion to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. 1. Press the JOG MODE select button so that the VINYL mode indicator lights. 2. During playback, press the top of the jog dial. ö Playback will slow and come to a stop (the time required to com- plete stop can be set independently). ö If the jog dial is rotated as playback slows but before it has com- pletely stopped, sound will be interrupted suddenly , and will then start again, but in the direction corresponding to the direction the jog dial is rotated in step 3. 3. Rotate the jog dial in the desired direction of playback. ö Playback will occur in proportion to the direction and speed of jog dial rotation. 4. Release hand from surface of jog dial. ö Playback will return to its original status (the time required until full acceleration can be set independently). â T o set the deceleration time (time until playback fully stops when jog dial surface is pressed) Rotate the TOUCH/BRAKE response dial. ö The time till playback stops changes. ö This is the same setting as the deceleration speed adjustment used when the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed in VINYL mode to temporarily pause playback. â T o set the acceleration time (time until playback fully re- gains original speed when hand is released from jog dial surface) Rotate the RELEASE/ST ART response dial. ö The time till playback returns to normal speed changes. ö This is the same setting as the acceleration speed adjustment used when the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed in VINYL mode to resume playback. [Hyper jog mode] When jog mode is set to VINYL mode ON, press the HYPERJOG MODE button so that the indicator lights. When the jog dial is then rotated, the amount of sound or image change will quadruple (x4) in response to the rotation angle of the dial. Spin play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. With VINYL mode ON, press the surface of the jog dial, or press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to set the unit to pause, then rotate the jog dial quickly; even if you remove your hand from the jog dial, playback will occur in proportion to the direction and speed of the jog dial rotation. Braking â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. ö During playback in VINYL mode, if the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed to pause playback, the sound decelerates at the braking speed set with the TOUCH/BRAKE dial. ö When the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button is pressed once again to resume playback, the sound accelerates at the speed set with the RELEASE/ ST ART dial. Hot cue â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. This function allows playback to be started quickly from one of three points (A, B, C), by previous setting of cue point and loop information. ö Storing to memory may not be possible while the jog dialâ s audio/ video memory status display is flashing. â Setting hot cue point 1. Press the HOT CUE REC MODE button so that the HOT CUE A, B, and C button indicators light red. 2. During playback, pause mode or cue standby mode, find the point you wish to use as the hot cue, and at that point press the button (A, B, or C) in which you wish to store the cue information. ö The button memory will recorded with the time position data and playback method. ö The pressed button will flash red for about 2 seconds, then light steadily . ö During DVD playback, a thumbnail of the hot cue point will be displayed on the preview monitor screen. ö If the HOT CUE button is pressed during the loop setting mode (while OUT/OUT ADJUST and IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST buttons are flashing), the currently playing loop information will be stored in memory . ö If a memory card is loaded, the data recorded to the HOT CUE button will be stored on the memory card; in this way , the previ- ously set information can be called up quickly when playing the same disc at a later date ( â P .47). Buttons and controls with the mark are disabled when the NORMAL/DJ switch is set to NORMAL.
44 Advanced Operations â Starting a hot cue 1. Press the HOT CUE REC MODE button so that the HOT CUE A, B, and C button indicators light green or orange. ö Buttons containing stored hot cue points will light green. ö Buttons containing stored loop information will light orange. ö Buttons without any stored information will not light. 2. During playback, pause, or cue standby mode, press one of the buttons with recorded information (A, B, or C). ö During playback, pause mode or cue standby mode, if a green or orange lighted button is pressed, playback will begin instantly based on the information recorded in the button. In this case, cue point information stored in the normal CUE button, or loop information stored in the RELOOP/EXIT button will not be overwritten, but remain valid. ö Pressing a HOT CUE button with stored loop information causes loop playback to begin instantly based on the stored information. In this case, the RELOOP/EXIT button can be used to cancel the loop playback just as with normal loop play; in addition, the IN/ REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button can be used to modify the loop-in point, and the OUT/OUT ADJUST button can be used to modify the loop-out point. If loop information is modified, the loop information stored in the button will simultaneously be modified. ö If a memory card is loaded, inserting a disc will allow previously recorded hot cue and loop information for that disc to be restored ( â P .48). * When playing a DVD that prohibits title or other searches, it may be impossible to begin playback from the hot cue point. In this case, the prohibited mark will appear in the display and the similar mark will appear on the monitor screen. * In the case of MP3, hot cue is supported only within one and the same folder . Loop playback â This function is not suppor ted when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. â T o create a loop 1. Press the PLA Y/P AUSE ( 3 / 8) button to begin playback. 2. During playback, press the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button. ö This step is unnecessary if you wish to use a previously recorded cue point as the loop-in point. ö During the time required for writing the loop-in point, the IN/ REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button will flash for about 2 sec- onds. REV FWD HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV DIRECTION CUE PLA Y/P AUSE 6 C A B HOT CUE HOT CUE REC MODE IN/ REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJUST OUT/ OUT ADJUST REV 1, FWD á 4-BEA T/ ONE-TRACK RELOOP/ EXIT BACK& FORTH DIRECTION FWD/REV CUE NORMAL/DJ Jog dial 3. During playback, press the OUT/OUT ADJUST button at the point you wish to use as the loop-out point. ö Repeat play (loop play) will begin without break between the se- lected loop-in and loop-out points. ö The frame search function can be used to set more accurate out points. ö If an alternate viewing angle or audio channel is selected before setting a loop-out point, it may not possible to designate a loop- out point. ö Loop-out points cannot be set during reverse play . ö In the case of MP3, looping is possible only within the same track where the cue point was set. â T o cancel loop play During loop playback, press the RELOOP/EXIT button. ö The loop will be canceled and playback will continue normally past the loop-out point. â T o adjust a loop-in point 1. During loop playback, press the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button. ö The display will show the loop-in point time, and the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button will flash rapidly , while the OUT/OUT ADJUST button light will go out. 2. Press the REV 1 /FWDá button, or rotate the jog dial. ö The loop-in point will be moved in one-frame increments. The permissible range of loop-in point adjustment is ñ30 frames during CD play , or ñ6 frames for DVD play , and must be located before the loop-out point. ö In the case of MP3 play , loop adjustment can be performed only within the same track where the cue point is set. ö The loop-in point cannot be adjusted during reverse play or scratch play . ö If the IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST button is pressed, or 30 seconds is allowed to elapse, the loop adjust mode will be canceled and operation will return to normal loop play . â T o adjsut a loop-out point 1. During loop playback, press the OUT/OUT ADJUST but- ton. ö The display will show the loop-out point time, and the OUT/OUT ADJUST button will flash rapidly , while the IN/REAL TIME CUE/ IN ADJSUT button indicator turns off. 2. Press the REV 1 /FWDá button, or rotate the jog dial. ö The loop-out point will change in one-frame units. ö The loop-out point cannot be moved to a location before the loop- in point. ö If the OUT/OUT ADJUST button is pressed, or 30 seconds is allowed to elapse, the loop adjust mode will be canceled and op- eration will return to normal loop play . ö The loop-out point cannot be adjusted during reverse play . ö In the case of MP3 play , loop adjustment can be performed only within the same track where the cue point is set. â T o return to a loop (reloop) After cancellation of a loop, press the RELOOP/EXIT button during normal playback. ö Playback will return to the loop-in point of the previously set loop, and loop play will resume. ö In the case of MP3, reloop can be performed only within the same folder .
45 Advanced Operations Relay play with two players â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. Relay play can be performed by using the supplied accessory control cord to connect the CONTROL connectors of this player and another CDJ series CD player . ö Set the auto cue functions of the two players to ON (auto cue ( A.CUE ) indicator lights in the display). ö If connected to a DJ mixer , set the mixer â s fader control to its center position. 1. Begin playback on the first player . 2. When the currently playing track ends, the other player (in standby mode) will automatically begin playback. 3. Set the first player to cue standby at the beginning of the next desired track. ö By repeating these steps, you can perform continuous automatic relay play between the two players. ö By replacing the disc on the waiting player and cueing it to a de- sired track, an unending variety of tracks can be played. ö By setting a cue point on the waiting player , playback can be set to begin automatically from any point in any desired track ( â P .40, â Setting cue pointsâ ). Notes: ö Relay play may not occur smoothly if the two players â audio output terminals are not connected to the same DJ mixer . ö If power is interrupted to the currently playing player , the other player will automatically begin playback. ö Since fader start and relay play require that the same control connectors be connected in different ways, they cannot be performed simultaneously . â Automatic loop setting 4-beat loop During playback, press the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button. ö The normal loop playback indicators will appear ( OUT/OUT AD- JUST and IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST buttons will flash). ö The point at which the button is pressed will become the loop-in point, and a loop-out point will be set automatically as described below; loop playback will then continue between the two points. ÷ If the immediately preceding BPM value is known, a point four beats afterwards will become the loop-out point. ÷ If the immediately preceding BPM value is not known, the loop- out point will be set four seconds after the loop-in point. ö When the RELOOP/EXIT button is pressed, the loop play will end and normal playback will resume. ö 4-beat loop cannot be designated during reverse play . One-track loop (chapter/track repeat) During playback, hold the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button de- pressed for 1 second or more. When the 4-BEA T/ONE-TRACK button is held depressed for 1 second or more during playback, one-track loop is enabled, thus repeating play- back of the currently playing chapter or track. ö The indicator â CHAPTER LOOPâ (during DVD playback) or â TRACK LOOP â (during CD or MP3 playback) will appear in the display , and the unit will search to the beginning of the currently playing chapter or track, and set the loop-in point there. ö The normal loop playback indicators will appear ( OUT/OUT ADJUST and IN/REAL TIME CUE/IN ADJUST buttons will flash), and the chap- ter end or track end will be automatically set at the loop-out points and playback will resume. ö If the RELOOP/EXIT button is pressed, the loop play will be canceled and normal playback will resume. ö When recording to a memory card, record after playing the track to the end. ö One-track loop cannot be designated during reverse play . [Back & Forth Loop Mode] ö When the BACK & FORTH button is pressed so that the loop mode indicator lights, loop play will change to the back & forth loop mode. ö During the back & forth loop mode, repeated playback is performed in the forward direction from loop-in point to loop-out point, followed by reverse playback from the loop-out point to the loop-in point. ö If the BACK & FORTH button is pressed again so that the loop mode indicator goes out, playback will return to normal loop mode. Reverse play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. Set the DIRECTION FWD/REV select switch to the REV posi- tion (forward). The reverse indicator will light and play will commence in the reverse direction. ö The jog dial â s operation to accelerate/decelerate playback is reversed. ö During reverse playback, loop points cannot be set nor loop-out points modified. ö When track search or loop play are performed, the jog dial â s audio/ video memory status display will flash for 1 to 2 seconds and scratch/ reverse operations may not respond. About fader start play â This function is not supported when the rear panel NORMAL/DJ switch is set to the NORMAL position. When the accessory control cord is used to connect this player â s CON- TROL connector to the CONTROL connector of a Pioneer DJ mixer (sold separately), the operation of the DJ mixer â s channel fader lever can be used to release the player from cue standby and start playback instantly . Fader start can also be started by using the cross fader operation; when the fader lever is returned to its original position, the player also returns to its cue point (back cue) and enters cue standby .
46 Advanced Operations T o view guide displays Press the DISPLA Y button to turn the guide displays ON/OFF . In the DJ mode, onscreen guide displays are not output to the main video output ( VIDEO OUT) connectors; in this case, the button operates to enable and disable the guide displays (hot cue, cue point, playing time, etc.) output to the preview video output ( PREVIEW OUT) connectors. [DVD playback in DJ mode] CUE C B A Guide display ON Guide display OFF In the NORMAL mode, pressing the DISPLA Y button turns the guide display ON/OFF on both the main video and preview video outputs. Press- ing the DISPLA Y button changes the display contents in the following way: [DVD playback in NORMAL mode] ö Chapter and time may not be displayed with some titles. * T ransmission rate is a value indicating the data volume recorded on the DVD. While higher transmission rates indicate larger amounts of data, they do not necessarily translate to higher picture quality . Play 2 â 2 0. 30 T itle âÂÂ121. 13/121. 43 Play 2 â 2 0. 30 Chapter 0. 10/ 5. 43 Play 2 â 2 0. 30 Chapter âÂÂ5. 33/ 5. 43 Play T r .Rate: 2âÂÂ2 0. 30 8. 6 Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time Remaining title time T otal title time Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time Elapsed chapter time T otal chapter time Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time Remaining chapter time T otal chapter time Current title number - Chapter number Current title elapsed time T ransmission rate (*) level meter T ransmission rate level Display OFF 0 F O LDE R 00 F O LDE R F O LDE R 08 F O LDE R 09 F O LDE R 10MUS.m p3 11MUS.m p3 12MUS.m p3 13MUS.m p3 2 F O LDE R 3 F O LDE R 04FOLDER 05MUS.m p3 06MUS.m p3 MEN U ENTER O p e n RET U R N To p Exi t O 0 7F O LDE R 20MUS.m p3 21MUS.m p3 22MUS.m p3 MEN U ENTER O p e n RET U R N To p Exi t 7FOLDER 7 F O LDE R 7 F O LDE R 8 F O LDE R 09FOLDER 10MUS.m p3 11MUS.m p3 12MUS.m p3 13MUS.m p3 Selecting tracks with MP3 navigator (MP3 only) 1. Press the MENU button. ö The MP3 navigator screen will be displayed. Currently open folder Folder T rack 2. Use the up ( ) or down ( ) side of the cursor button to select the desired track or the folder holding the desired track. 3. With the cursor placed over a folder , press the ENTER button to open the selected folder . ö The folder can also be opened by pressing the right side ( ) of the cursor button. ö Pressing the left side ( ) of the cursor button will cause the dis- play to return to the next higher folder level. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the desired track. 5. Press ENTER. ö Playback of the selected track will begin. When the cursor is moved over a folder , press the ENTER button to display the folderâ s con- tents. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT ENTER MENU DISPLA Y
47 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) Operations Using Memory Cards â Using memory cards This player supports the use of SD memory cards or MultiMedia Cards for the recording of disc identification data, cue point data, loop point data, and hot cue data. Data regarding cue points and loop points include each point â s position, as well as audio channel, angle, and thumbnail image. Thumbnail images cannot be recorded, however , in the case of copy-protected discs (included those using Macrovision technologies). â SD memory cards must be formatted in accordance with â SD Memory Card Specifications Part2 FILE SYSTEM SPECIFICA- TION V ersion 1.0 â (commercially purchased SD memory cards are factory formatted to the above standards). Unformatted cards cannot be used (the â UNFORMA T â message will be dis- played). â Memory cards formatted on computers or in digital cameras may not be usable with this player . â MultiMedia Cards (MMC) formatted on the CDJ-1000 or CDJ- 1000MK2 have the following limitations: ö DVD and MP3 data cannot be recorded. ö Loop data set in hot cues cannot be recorded. ö It is not possible to use a computer to copy or backup the cards. ö When recording loop points, a single loop point requires two points of memory area. ö The cards cannot be reformatted in this unit. â Loading a memory card Open the memory card door , and insert the memory card, label side up and with the beveled edge toward the front. Insert the card slowly , hold- ing it flat, and push it in until it stops. Shut the memory card door . The display will show â SD CARD â (for cards conforming to the SD memory card standard) or â CDJ CARD â (for cards formatted with the CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2), followed by the number of discs whose data are recorded on the card. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV CUE MEMORY CUE Memory CARD indicator Label surface up Memory card Memory card door T o protect important data ö Set the write-protect switch to the LOCK position to prevent fur - ther writing to the card. Return the switch to its original position if you wish to record further data on the card. ö The CARD indicator lights while the recorder is writing data to the disc. During this period, do not attempt to remove the card, or disconnect power to the unit, since card data may be destroyed. Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for damage to or loss of data recorded on memory cards, or other incidental damages arising from such loss. Rear view Write-protect switch Notes: ö Do not open the card door or turn off power while the CARD indicator is flashing, since the recorded data may be dam- aged. ö Memory cards are precision electronic devices. Do not bend or drop them, or subject them to strong forces or impacts. Also, avoid using or storing memory cards in environments subject to static electricity or electrical noise. ö Memory cards can be broken when subjected to impacts or static electricity . Be very careful when handling them, and make regular backups of important recorded data ( â P . 50). ö Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for damage to or loss of data recorded on memory cards, or other incidental dam- ages arising from such loss. Recording to memory cards ö Up to 100 points (total of both cue and loop points) can be stored for each disc. When 100 points have been stored, attempts to record further points will result in the display of the â POINT FULL â mes- sage, and no further points can be recorded. ö If insufficient memory space exists on the card to record the current points, the â CARD FULL â message will appear . ö If the card has been set to write-protect, the â CARD PROTECTEDâ message will be displayed. â Recording a cue point 1. Use the auto cue function or CUE button to input a cue point. 2. Press the MEMORY button. ö The display will show the cue point position data, and the word â CARD MEMORYâ will appear in the display , indicating that the cue point has been stored in the memory card. ö If no memory card is loaded, the â NO CARDâ message will ap- pear . ö If the memory card door is open without any memory card being loaded, the message â CLOSE CARD DOOR â will appear in the display . ö Removing the memory card Open the memory card door and wait until the CARD indicator lamp goes out, then press in the memory card slightly and allow it to eject; grasp the end of the card and pull out carefully .
48 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV ENTER CUE/LOOP CALL MEMORY C A B HOT CUE HOT CUE REC MODE ENTER â Message displays during recording of cue and loop points Player display â CARD MEMORYâ â CANNOT MEMORIZE ON THIS CARDâ â CARD FULLâ â CARD PROTECTEDâ â INTERNAL MEMORYâ , followed by â NO CARDâ â INTERNAL MEMORYâ , followed by â CLOSE CARD DOORâ â UNFORMA T â â CARD ERRORâ â POINT FULLâ â CARD MEMORYâ , followed by â PICTURE IS NOT RECORDEDâ Contents Cue point or loop point data have been successfully recorded on the memory card. Displayed during DVD/MP3 playback, when a memory card formatted and recorded using the CDJ- 1000 or CDJ-1000MK2 has been loaded on this unit and an attempt is made to record data to the card. Point data cannot be recorded. Insufficient space remains on the memory card. Point data cannot be recorded to the card. The memory card â s LOCK (write protect) function is enabled, and further point data cannot be recorded on the card. No memory card is loaded. A memory card is loaded, but the memory card door has not been closed. Close the door and retry . Displayed when the loaded memory card does not conform to SD memory card standards, or has not been formatted to CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2 (MMC) standards. Point data cannot be recorded on the card. The loaded memory card appears to be damaged. Displayed when the total number of recorded cue points and loop points has already reached 100. Displayed when an attempt is made to record points from a copy-protected disc. Thumbnail image is not recorded. Insert memory card whenever recording cue point data, loop point data, hot cue data, or W A VE data. If no memory card is inserted, any designated setting data will be lost when the power is turned off or the disc is removed. â Recording a loop point 1. Set a loop-in point and loop-out point and begin loop play- back. 2. During loop playback, press the MEMORY button. ö The display will show the cue point position data, and the word â CARD MEMORYâ will appear in the display , indicating that the loop-in and loop-out points have been stored in the memory card. ö If no memory card is loaded, the â NO CARDâ message will ap- pear . ö If the memory card door is open without any memory card being loaded, the message â CLOSE CARD DOOR â will appear in the display . â Recording hot cue points A, B, C Hot cue points A, B, and C are automatically recorded on the memory card. â W A VE display Wave displays are automatically recorded on the memory card. * As one example of the use of a 32 MB SD memory card, up to 75 discs â worth of cue and loop points can be recorded per card (assum- ing use of DVD discs with 20 points per disc, and recording of thumb- nail images for each point). T o recall data recorded on memory cards â T o recall a recorded cue or loop point 1. Press the CUE/LOOP CALL button. ö The preview monitor screen will display the cue point navigation menu. 1âÂÂ006 0.00.39 CUE ENTER CALL C B A While the call screen is displayed, point information is also shown on the player â s display .
49 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) If thumbnail images are not recorded, the memory point time data for the cue points or loop points will be displayed instead. Point information is also shown on the main unit â s display, allowing you to select points even without a preview monitor . 2. Use the cursor button ( / / / ) to select the desired thumbnail image, and press the ENTER button. While reading data from a memory card, the main unit â s display will show the âÂÂCUE Readin â or â LOOP Readin â message. ö The cue point or loop point will be read into the player , and the memory point time will be displayed; the player will search for the cue point and enter cue standby there. CUE C B A â T o read a cue/loop point into a hot cue 1. Press the CUE/LOOP CALL button. ö The preview monitor screen will display the cue point navigation menu. 1 âÂÂ00 1 0.11.05 CUE ENTER CALL C B A While the call screen is displayed, point information is also shown on the play- er â s display. 2. Use the cursor button to select the desired thumbnail im- age, and press the HOT CUE REC MODE button so that the HOT CUE A, B, and C button indicators light red. Then press the button (A, B, or C) into which you wish to store the hot cue point. While reading data from the memory card, the main unit â s display will show the â HOT * Readin â message. ö Playback will begin when data reading is completed. CUE C B A ö When playing a copy-protected disc, thumbnail image of set point data cannot be recorded to the memory card. 1 âÂÂ001 0.23 1 âÂÂ002 0.04 1 âÂÂ003 0.05 1 âÂÂ004 0.02 1 âÂÂ004 0.07 1 âÂÂ006 0.00 1 âÂÂ006 0.06 1 âÂÂ006 0.12 1 âÂÂ006 0.20 1 âÂÂ006 0.28 1 âÂÂ006 0.45 1 âÂÂ006 1.11 1 âÂÂ00 6 0.06.00 CUE ENTER CALL C B A ö Cue point navigation screen when CD is loaded. TRK âÂÂ01 0.35 TRK âÂÂ01 0.39 TRK âÂÂ01 3.57 TRK âÂÂ03 0.11 TRK â 01 0.39.60 CUE ENTER CALL C B A ö Cue point navigation screen displays during MP3 playback are as fol- lows. â â NTER C ALL 01 â 001 0 . 03 01 â 008 0 . 06 01 â 004 0 .1 1 01 â 003 0 . 01 â T o recall recorded hot cue points Hot cue points A, B, and C are automatically recorded on the memory card. If points have been previously recorded for a disc, when that disc is inserted the HOT CUE buttons A , B, and C will begin flashing green or orange. T o call one of the recorded hot cue points, press the correspond- ing button A , B , or C . The flashing green or orange button will change to light steadily (sound will not begin instantly when a point is called up). If you have no need of calling one of the hot cue points, press the HOT CUE REC MODE button. The indicators will change to red, and the hot cue setting mode will be enabled. (T o subsequently call up one of the hot cue points previously recorded on the memory card, remove the disc or memory card and reinsert it so that the A , B , and C buttons flash once again. Then press the desired flashing button). â W A VE display When playing a track with which you have previously used the W A VE display function, the recorded W A VE pattern will automatically be re- called and displayed. Point information is also shown on the main unit â s display, allowing you to select points even without a preview monitor .
50 Advanced Operations (Operations Using Memory Cards) T o delete information recorded on memory cards â T o delete individual cue/loop points 1. Press the CUE/LOOP CALL button. ö The preview monitor screen will display the cue point navigation menu. 2. Use the cursor button ( / / / ) to select the thumbnail of the cue point you wish to erase, then press the DE- LETE button. ö The display will show the â DELETEâ message, and the selected cue point or loop point data will be erased from the memory card. â T o delete all cue/loop point information for an entire disc 1. Load the disc whose cue/loop point information you wish to erase. 2. Hold the DELETE button depressed for 5 or more seconds. ö The display will scroll the â DISC DELETE? PUSH MEMORYâ con- firmation message. 3. Press the MEMORY button. ö All cue and loop data for the loaded disc will be deleted from the memory card. ö If any button other than the MEMORY button is pressed, the de- lete mode will be canceled. â T o delete all memory card data 1. With no disc loaded, hold the DELETE button depressed for 5 seconds or more. ö The display will scroll the â ALL DELETE? PUSH MEMORYâ con- firmation message. 2. Press the MEMORY button. ö All data will be deleted from the memory card. ö If any button other than the MEMORY button is pressed, the de- lete mode will be canceled. T o copy memory card data 1. With no disc or memory card loaded: Hold the MEMORY button pressed for 5 seconds or more. ö The display will scroll the â COPY MODEâ â CARD A INâ mes- sages. 2. Insert the original source memory card into the memory card slot. ö The display will show the â READINGâ message; after several min- utes, the â CARD B IN â message will appear . 3. Remove the source card and insert the target memory card. ö Be sure to delete earlier contents of the target card to provide sufficient recording capacity . ö The display will show the â WRITINGâ message, and after several minutes, the â CARD A IN â message will appear . 4. Remove the target card, and once more insert the origi- nal source card. ö The display will show the â READINGâ message; after several min- utes, the â CARD B IN â message will appear . 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required. ö The copying process is completed when the display shows the â COMPLETEâ message. ö Copying of a full 32 MB memory card will require a maximum of 3 cycles of recording steps 3 and 4. ö If the target card has insufficient memory capacity to complete the copying process, the â CAP ACITY ERROR â message will ap- pear . ö If you possess a computer with memory card reader , the reader can be used to copy your memory cards. (A computer cannot be used to copy Multimedia cards (MMC) formatted with the CDJ-1000 or CDJ- 1000MK2.) â P .47, precautions regarding memory card formatting. REV FWD DIRECTION HOT CUE REC MODE LOOP OUT ADJUST TEMPO IN ADJUST ENTER CUE REALTIME CUE IN OUT RELOOP/ EXIT 4-BEAT ONE-TRACK CUE / LOOP CALL BACK & FORTH ANGLE SUBTITLE AUDIO DISPLAY DELETE MEMORY MENU T.MENU RETURN SETUP TOUCH/BRAKE RELEASE/START JOG MODE VINYL HYPERJOG MODE TEMPO MASTER TEMPO WIDE TEXT MODE TIME MODE AUTO CUE DVD TITLE MP3 FOLDER JOG ADJUST LIGHT HEAVY TEMPO RESET REV FWD POWER OFF ON STOP LOCK UNLOCK EJECT PLAY/P AUSE DVJ-1000 PREVIOUS NEXT FWD REV CUE/LOOP CALL MEMORY DELETE
51 Other (T roubleshooting) T roubleshooting Incorrect operations can be mistaken as malfunctions. If you believe the unit is not operating correctly , consult the chart be low . Sometimes incorrect operation may be due to a malfunction in another component. If the problem is not fixed, check the other components used with the player . If the problem still persists, contact your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or dealer for service. Symptom No power . Discs donâÂÂt eject when the EJECT ( 0 ) button is pressed. Playback doesnâÂÂt start when a disc is inserted. Playback stops immediately after starting. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs cannot be played. â NOT VIDEO FORMA T â is displayed. CanâÂÂt play DVD. The marks appear . MP3 canâÂÂt be played. CanâÂÂt search for MP3 files. Images donâÂÂt appear on screen. No sound. Sound is distorted or has noise. Certain discs produce much noise. Playback is interrupted. DVDs and CDs produce different sound volumes. When auto cue function is ON, track search does not end. During playback, back cue doesnâÂÂt occur when CUE button is pressed. Loop play doesnâÂÂt start when OUT/ OUT ADJUST button is pressed. Auto cue setting is not retained. All settings cannot be returned to their factory defaults. Probable Diagnosis ö Power cord isnâÂÂt connected. ö The eject/stop mode select switch is set to LOCK . ö Auto cue function is set to ON. ö Disc is loaded with label side down. ö Disc is fogged or dirty. ö The disc has a differ ent region number . ö Disc isnâÂÂt recorded in video format. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂDJ âÂÂ. Some DVDs are constructed to prohibit playing in DJ mode. ö Operation is pr ohibited by disc or player . ö Format is wrong. ö Y ou attempted to search (fast forward/reverse) for files in a different folder . ö Output cables are loose or not connected correctly . ö Impr oper operation of television or video mixer , etc. ö Output cables ar e loose or not connected correctly . ö Impr oper operation of audio mixer . ö Connectors or plugs ar e dirty . ö Player is set to pause mode. ö Output cables are not connected correctly. ö Connectors or plugs ar e dirty . ö Electromagnetic influence from television. ö Disc has large scratches. ö Disc is ver y dirty . ö Due to difference in recording formats. ö If intervals between tracks is very long, track search takes longer . ö If a non-recorded intervals continue for more than 10 seconds, play will not begin unless auto cue function is turned OFF . ö No cue point is set. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL âÂÂ. ö With DVD, some discs do not support DJ operations during playback. ö When playing MP3, cue point is in another folder . ö No cue point (loop-in point) has been set. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL âÂÂ. ö Cue points and angle, audio settings are different. ö With DVD, some discs do not support point DJ operations during playback. ö The power was turned off right after settings were made or changed. Remedy ö Connect power cord properly . ö Set the player to pause mode or cue standby mode then press EJECT ( 0) button. ö Set the eject/stop mode selector switch to UNLOCK then press EJECT ( 0 ) button. ö Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 1 second or more to turn the auto cue function off. ö Reload the disc with label side up. ö Clean the disc. ö Check the disc for correct region number . If it is not correct, it cannot be played on this unit. ö Record disc in video format. ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â NORMALâÂÂ. ö Perform correct operation. ö See section â Playing MP3 filesâ on page 10. ö MP3 searches can be performed only within the same folder . ö Connect correctly . ö Confirm settings of television or video mixer , etc. ö Connect cables correctly . ö Check audio mixerâ s switches and volume settings. ö Clean connectors and plugs. ö Press PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to begin playback. ö Connect cables correctly to audio mixer line input connectors. Do not connect to MIC connector . ö Clean connectors and plugs. ö T urn off television or move farther away . ö Replace disc. ö Clean disc. ö Not a malfunction. ö Hold the TIME MODE/AUTO CUE button depressed for 1 second or more to turn auto cue function OFF . ö Set a cue point. ( â P .40) ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Play back a part supporting DJ operations. ö Back cue with MP3 can be performed only within the same folder . ö Set a loop-in point. ( â P .44) ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Set angle and audio conditions the same. ö Play a part supporting DJ operations. ö Wait 10 seconds before turning off the unit after changing settings.
52 Other (T roubleshooting) Symptom Jog dial doesn â t respond. Jog dial performs different operation from that intended. DJ operations don âÂÂt respond. With power ON, disc stops. Screen images stops and com- mands don â t respond. Setting items don âÂÂt appear on Setup Menu. Digital sound isn â t reproduced. 96 kHz audio is not output in digital. DTS audio is not reproduced. Image appears stretched horizon- tally or vertically . During DVD playback, image is distorted or dark. Subtitles don âÂÂt appear . Can â t open Setup Menu. When angle is changed, playback is momentarily interrupted. When audio format is changed, playback is momentarily interrupted. Title or chapter search command doesn â t respond. Can â t begin playback from title or chapter designated before loading disc. Cue point navigation menu doesn â t display thumbnail images. Cue point memory cannot be recorded. Can â t use SD memory cards. Probable Diagnosis ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL â . ö Jog mode is incorrect. ö Hyper -jog mode is incorrect. ö With DVD, some discs do not support point DJ operations during playback. ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂNORMAL â . ö With DVD, some discs or players do not support point DJ operations during playback. ö â DISABLE DJ MODEâ is displayed. ö With DVD, DJ operations not be possible when playback is performed from the Setup Menu. ö If left in pause mode without command input for 100 minutes or more, player automatically stops disc rotation. ö Disc rotation stops with disc playback completes last track. ö Operations prohibited on some discs. ö Setup Menu is set for [ Basic ] mode. ö [ Digital Out ] option is set to [ Off]. ö [ 96kHz PCM Out ] option is set to [ 96kHz 3 48kHz ]. ö Some discs prohibit 96 kHz output. ö Amplifier or decoder does not support DTS audio. ö [ TV Screen ] option settings are incorrect. ö S-terminal video output connection is incorrect. ö Disc is equipped with analog copy protect technology . ö NORMAL/DJ switch is set to âÂÂDJ â . (Subtitles aren âÂÂt displayed in DJ mode) ö Setup cannot be performed during playback in DJ mode. ö In DJ mode, a special playback mode is used so changing the angle causes temporary playback interruption. ö In DJ mode, a special playback mode is used so changing the audio causes temporary playback interruption. ö With DVD, some discs do not support certain operations. ö With DVD, some discs require playback from a specified place. ö Disc is copy protected. ö No memory card is loaded. ö Disc loaded is CD. ö During DVD/MP3 play , the inserted memory card was recorded on a CDJ-1000, CDJ-1000MK2. ö No memory card is loaded. ö SD memory card has been set for write-protect. ö SD memory card not loaded. ö SD memory card has been set for write-protect. ö SD memory card not formatted properly . Remedy ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Press the JOG MODE button to select desired jog mode (VINYL ON/OFF). ö Press the HYPERJOG MODE button to select desired mode. ö Play a part supporting DJ operations. ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â DJâÂÂ. ö Play a part supporting DJ operations. ö DJ operations are not supported here. Play a part of the disc supporting DJ operations. ö Press PLA Y/P AUSE ( 6 ) button to resume playback. Or press EJECT ( 0) button to remove disc. ö Press the STOP button, then begin playback again. ö Set Setup Menu to [ Expert ] mode. ö Set [ Digital Out ] option to [ On ]. ö Set [ 96kHz PCM Out] option to [ 96kHz ]. ö Press audio button to select audio format other than DTS. ö Set [ TV Screen] options properly . ö Due to television signal processing, images may appear lengthened horizontally or vertically . In this case, set [ S-Video Out ] option to [ S1 ]. ö Not a malfunction. ö Set NORMAL/DJ switch to â NORMALâÂÂ. ö Stop playback before performing settings. ö Perform settings in NORMAL mode. ö Not a malfunction. ö Not a malfunction. ö Not a malfunction. ö Not a malfunction. ö If the disc includes a copy-protect signal, thumbnail images cannot be recorded to the memory card. ö Insert memory card formatted in compliance with SD memory card standards. ö Thumbnail images are not displayed with CDs. ö DVD/MP3 data cannot be recorded to multimedia cards (MMC) recorded on a CDJ- 1000 or CDJ-1000MK2. ö Insert memory card formatted in compliance with SD memory card standards. ö Set write-protect switch to allow writing to card. ö Insert SD memory card. ö Set write-protect switch to allow writing to card. ö Insert memory card formatted in compliance with SD memory card standards.
53 Other (T roubleshooting) ö This component may fail to operate properly due to influence of static electricity or other external influences. In this case, try turning off the POWER switch, and turn on the power again only when the disc has fully stopped rotating. ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in video format unless they have been finalized. ö This unit cannot play DVD-R/DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format. ö This unit cannot play partially recorded CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been finalized. ö This unit plays only standard 12 cm discs and 8 cm discs mounted in proper disc adapters; it cannot play irregularly shaped dis cs (damage or malfunctions may occur). ö When playing 8 cm discs mounted on adapters, some speed loss may be experienced when using scratch and reverse operations. This unit for high performance when rotating discs at high speed, but when 8 cm discs are mounted in adapters, the rotation spe ed is reduced for safety . This is not a malfunction. ö BPM values measured with this unit may differ from published values found on DVD or CD labels, or those measured on Pioneer DJ mixers. This is a result of differences in BPM measuring methods, and is not a malfunction. ö When playing DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-RW discs, some degradation in performance may be experienced depending on the recording quality of the individual disc. ö This unit supports analog copy-pr otection technology . Some discs include copy-protection signals and when such discs are played , some images may display horizontal stripes or other distortions, this is not a malfunction. Also, when viewing or recording ima ges through a VTR, the copy guard device may prevent proper playback. ö In DJ mode, the following option values change, regardless of the setting of the Setup Menu. Setup Menu item Setting value [ TV Screen]: [ 4:3 (Letter Box) ] (The 4:3(Pan&Scan) format is not supported in DJ mode.) [ Still Picture]: [ Auto] [ Angle indicator]: [ Off] ö When playing DVDs, the same disc may display different playback patterns when played in DJ mode and NORMAL mode. ö SD memory cards formatted using ordinary computer OS formatting software are not generally compatible with SD memory card standards. Error message display When the unit is unable to operate properly , an error code is displayed on the display panel. Check the error code displayed against the following table and take the recommended action to correct the error . If an error code other than any of the error codes listed in the table below is displayed or if the same error code is displayed even after corrective action has been taken, contact your nearest Pioneer Service Station or contact the store from which you purchased your player for assistance. Error code E â 72 01 E â 83 01 E â 83 02 E â 83 03 E-83 04 E-83 05 E â 91 01 E â 72 02 Error type TOC READ ERROR PLA YER ERROR MP3 DECODE ERROR DA T A FORMA T ERROR MECHANICAL TIME OUT WRONG REGION NO. Error content Can â t read TOC data. Can â t play this disc properly . Loaded disc cannot be played properly . Mechanical operation did not end within specified time. Does not match supported region number . Cause and remedy Disc is cracked. = Replace disc. Disc is dirty . = Clean disc. If other discs operate normally , pr oblem is with this disc. Does not conform to MP3 format. = Change to disc conforming to MP3 format. Foreign object in disc loading slot. = Remove foreign object. Confirm the region number for the disc. Discs cannot be played if their region number is not supported.
54 Other (Dot Matrix Guide Display Messages) Message LOAD IN END EJECT NO DISC STOP RESUME STILL PLA Y P AUSE SEARCH á 1, á 2, á 3 1 1, 1 2, 1 3 CHAPTER LOOP TRACK LOOP NO TRACK DISABLE DJ MODE NOT VIDEO FORMA T SETUP MENU NO TEXT NORMAL DJ MODE SD CARD CDJ CARD *****DISCS CARD MEMORY CANNOT MEMORIZE ON THIS CARD CARD FULL CARD PROTECTED INTERNAL MEMORY NO CARD Event/Display T iming Displayed when loading a disc. Displayed at end of playback. Displayed during ejection of a disc. Displayed when no disc is loaded. Displayed when the STOP button is pressed. Displayed during resume mode. Displayed when playing a still image during DVD playback in NORMAL mode. Displayed during DVD playback in NORMAL mode. Displayed during DVD pause mode in NORMAL mode. Displayed during DVD chapter search or title search in NORMAL mode. Displays DVD fast forward speed in NORMAL mode. Displays DVD fast reverse speed in NORMAL mode. Displayed when one-track loop command is received during DVD playback. Displayed when one-track loop command is received during CD or MP3 playback. Displayed when the CD-ROM/CD-R/CD-RW disc loaded contains no MP3 files. Displayed during DVD play in DJ mode, when attempting an operation at a point not sup- ported in DJ mode. Displayed when playing a DVD not recorded in video format (VR format, DVD audio or DVD- ROM/DVD-R/DVD-RW discs containing no MP3 files, etc.). Displayed when television monitor shows setup menu screen. Displayed when showing menu or top menu during DVD play . Displayed when no supported text data is available. Displayed when power is turned on in NOR- MAL mode, or when switching the NORMAL/ DJ switch to NORMAL mode. Also displayed when a button is pressed or operation at- tempted that is not supported in NORMAL mode. Displayed when switching to DJ mode. Displayed when a memory card conforming to SD memory card standards is loaded. Displayed when a memory card formatted on CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2 is loaded. Displayed when a memory card is loaded, following the above display; indicates number of disc data recorded on the card. Displayed when cue point or loop point data is recorded to memory card. When playing DVD/MP3, displayed when attempting to record to a card formatted on CDJ-1000 or CDJ-1000MK2. Displayed when the loaded memory card has insufficient capacity . Displayed when the write-protect (LOCK) function has been set on the loaded memory card. Displayed when attempting to record cue point or loop point data without a properly loaded memory card. Displayed when no memory card is loaded. Message CLOSE CARD DOOR UNFORMA T CARD ERROR POINT FULL PICTURE IS NOT RECORDED READ ERROR CUE POINT LOOP POINT NO POINT CUE Readin LOOP Readin HOT A Readin HOT B Readin HOT C Readin COPY -MODE CARD A IN READING CARD B IN WRITING COMPLETE CAP ACITY ERROR NO DA TA DISC DELETE ? PUSH MEMORY ALL DELETE ? PUSH MEMORY DELETE A.CUE-**dB AUTO PA L NTSC factory defaults Event/Display Timing Displayed when a memory card is loaded, but the memory card door has not been closed. Displayed when the card loaded does not conform to SD memory card standards, or was not formatted on a CDJ-1000, CDJ-1000MK2 (MMC). Displayed to indicate corrupted memory card. Displayed when the total number of cue points and loop points recorded has already reached 100. Displayed when setting a point for a copy- protected disc. Displayed when the card inserted contains corrupted data. Displayed when using cue point navigation to select cue point data. Displayed when using cue point navigation to select loop point data. Displayed when point data is not recorded with cue point navigation. Displayed when using cue point navigation to read in (call) cue point data. Displayed when using cue point navigation to read in (call) loop point data. Displayed when reading in (calling) hot cue A data from cue point navigation, or when hot cue point is reread after loading a disc. Displayed when reading in (calling) hot cue B data from cue point navigation, or when hot cue point is reread after loading a disc. Displayed when reading in (calling) hot cue C data from cue point navigation, or when hot cue point is reread after loading a disc. Displayed when beginning memory card copy mode. Displayed in copy mode when no source memory card is loaded. Displayed in copy mode when reading data from source memory card. Displayed in copy mode when no destination memory card is loaded. Displayed in copy mode when writing data to destination memory card. Displayed when memory card copying is completed. Displayed when destination memory card has insufficient capacity . Displayed when source memory card contains no data. Confirmation screen displayed when erasing cue point/loop point memory data from memory card in units of disc. Confirmation screen displayed when erasing all data from memory card. Displayed while erasing data from memory card. Displays auto cue level. Displayed when TV system setting for video output is set to AUTO. Displayed when TV system setting for video output is set to P AL. Displayed when TV system setting for video output is set to NTSC. Displayed when all settings have been returned to their factory default values. Dot Matrix Guide Display Messages
55 Other (Specifications) 1. General T ype of Unit ........................................................ DVD video, CD Power ............................................................... AC 120 V , 60 Hz Power consumption .......................................................... 42 W Operating environment temperature ........................................ 5 ð C to 35 ð C ( 41 ð F to 95 ðF) Operating environment humidity ............................... 5 % to 85 % (RH) without condensation Weight ................................................................ 5.4 kg (11.9 lb) External dimensions ............................. 320 mm (W) à408 mm (D) à109 mm (H) 12 5/8 in. (W) à16 1/16 in. (D) à4 5/16 in. (H) 2. Video output section Composite output (2) Output level ...................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Output connector sets ................................ RCA (1), BNC (1) S-Video output Y output level .................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C output level ................................ 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) (NTSC) 300 mVp-p (75 â¦) (P AL) Output connector ........................................................ S type 3. Preview video output section Composite output Output level ...................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Output connector ................................................... RCA type S-Video output Y output level .................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C output level ................................ 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) (NTSC) 300 mVp-p (75 â¦) (P AL) Output connector ........................................................ S type Specifications 4. Audio output section Audio output (2-channel) Audio output level .............................. 2.0 V rms (1 kHz, 0 dB) Channels .............................................................................. 2 Output connectors .................................................. RCA type Digital audio output response Frequency response (CD) ............................... 4 Hz to 20 kHz Frequency response (DVD [96 kHz] ) .............. 4 Hz to 44 kHz S/N ratio ........................................... 115 dB or above (JEIT A) T otal harmonic distortion ............................. 0.004 % (JEIT A) Digital output Coaxial digital output ..................................... RCA connector 5. Other connectors Control connector ........................................ Minijack ( ø 3.5 mm) Sync input connector .................................................. BNC type 6. Accessories ö Power cord .......................................................................... 1 ö Audio cable .......................................................................... 1 ö Video cable .......................................................................... 1 ö Control cord ......................................................................... 1 ö Forcible eject pin (mounted on unit â s bottom panel) ........... 1 ö Operating Instructions ......................................................... 1 ö Warranty card ...................................................................... 1 All specifications and descriptions are subject to change without notice. Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-com- mercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other me- dia), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com MPEG Layer -3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. 300 Allstate Parkway Markham, ON L3R OP2 (905) 479-4411 1 (877) 283-5901 For warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pio- neer Authorized Service Company in Canada. Alternatively , please contact the Customer Service Department at the following address: Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company , or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below . 800 â 421 â 1625 Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support Division at the above listed number for assistance. PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA), INC. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P .O. BOX 1760, LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. For warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product.
Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2006 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. Multimedia and Mass Storage Division: 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810, U.S.A. TEL: 800-444-OPTI (6784) PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. Industrial Products Department: 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 905-479-4411 Printed in Japan <DRB1413-A>